Complete Solution for Motor Protection · INSTRUCTION MANUAL MCOMP User Manual - REV. C Complete...

Complete Solution for Motor Protection

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

MCOMP User Manual - REV. C

Complete Solution for Motor Protection

The content of this publication is subject to change

without notice. Larsen & Toubro Limited reserves the

right to make product-improvement changes which

may or may not be re�ected in this publication. Larsen

& Toubro Limited is not responsible for any inadvertent

admissions, omissions, or errors. Larsen & Toubro

Limited assumes no liability for damages arising out of,

or in connection with, the application or use of any

product or application described herein.

© 2016 Larsen & Toubro Limited. All rights reserved.

L&T Electrical & AutomationElectrical Systems & Equipment

Head of�ce7C, TC II, Tower B, L&T Business Park,L&T Gate No. 5, Saki Vihar Road, Powai,Mumbai 400 072, India

Rev. CReleased Date - September, 2016


CONTENTS

1.0

2.0

3.0

4.0

PREFACE � Manual Overview Version� Purpose of This Manual� � Safety and General Information � Conventions and Nomenclature Conventions� Nomenclatures�

INTRODUCTION � About the Relay Reasons for Motor Protections� � Product Overview Relay Main unit� Status of LED Indication� � Current Module (CM) � Display unit � DIO Expansion unit LED Indication on expansion unit � � MCOMP Order Codes � Getting Started

SPECIFICATIONS � General � Dimensions � Type Tests � Certi�cations � Environmental Conditions � Relay Elements � Metering � Monitoring

INSTALLATION � Overview � Mechanical Installation Dimensions� Main unit Dimensions � CM 1 Dimensions� CM 2-5 Dimensions� DIO Expansion Module Dimensions� Display Dimensions� � Product Identi�cation Label � Mounting Relay Mounting� CM Mounting� Display Mounting� DIO Expansion Module Mounting�

0102020202020203

050606070707080808090911

121314151515161818

192020202020212121222222222323


CONTENTS

5.0

� Electrical Installation� Relay Main Unit Wiring 3 Phase Voltage Connections� 3-Phase Current Connections� Con�guration Port Connection� RTD/PTC and Analog O/P Connections� Communication Port Connection� Auxiliary Power Supply Connection� Digital Input Connections� Digital Output Connections�� Current Module (CM) Wiring� Display Wiring� Expansion Unit Wiring

METERING AND MONITORING� Overview� Metering Current Based Metering� RMS Line Current� Earth Fault Current� Average RMS Current� Thermal Capacity� Current Unbalance� Voltage Based Metering� RMS Line Voltage� RMS Phase Voltage� Average RMS Voltage� Frequency� Power and Energy Based Metering� Power� Energy� Power Factor� Miscellaneous Parameter� Temperature� Digital Input/Output Status� COMPlogic output Status�� Monitoring Motor Speci�c Data Monitoring� Phase Sequence� Motor Starting Time� CM Type� Number of Starts� Number of Stops� Motor Run Hours� Total Motor Run Hours� Starting Peak Current� Annunciations�

24252626272828303031313335

373838383838383838383838383839393939393939393939393940404040404040


CONTENTS

6.0

7.0

PROTECTIONS� Overview� Thermal Protection Overload (49)�� Current Based Protection Over current Protection (50P)� Under current Protection (37)� Current unbalance Protection (46)� Earth Fault Protection (50N or 50SG)� Locked Rotor Protection (50LR)� IDMT Overcurrent (51P/51N)� Phase Loss Protection (47A)�� Voltage Based Protection Over voltage Protection (59)� Under voltage Protection (27)� Voltage unbalance Protection (47)� Phase reversal Protection (47B)�� Frequency Based Protection Under frequency Protection (81L)� Over frequency Protection (81H)�� Advanced Features Re-acceleration (27LV)� Temperature Monitoring� Maximum Number of Starts Protection (66)� Fail to Stop Protection� Interlock 1 to 12� Communication Failure Monitoring� Excessive Start Time Protection� Analog Input Monitoring�

COMMUNICATION� Overview� Communication Interface� Communication Protocol Modbus RTU� Supported Modbus Function Codes � Modbus RTU Settings � Modbus memory map � Pro�bus DP� Pro�bus Settings� Pro�bus memory map� Modbus TCP/IP� Modbus TCP/IP Settings� Modbus TCP/IP Memory Map�� Parameter Mapping Status Word�� Communication Architecture Modbus Architecture� Pro�bus Architecture�

4142434346464647474848494949505051515151515153545454545454

56575757575858585859595959606062626262


CONTENTS

8.0

9.0

SETTINGS� Overview� Setting Parameters System Setting Parameters� Protection Setting Parameters� Digital Input Output Setting Parameters� Basic Digital Input/Output� DIO Expansion Module� Digital Input Settings� Digital Output Settings� Analog Output Settings� Communication Setting Parameters� COMPlogic Setting Parameters� COMPlogic Modules� Truth Table� Signal Conditioner� Counters� Timers� List of logical Inputs� � Relay Con�guration Relay Con�guration through the Display� Relay Con�guration through MCOMP suite� Relay Con�guration through Communication�� Examples of Relay Selection and Basic Settings using Motor data Case 1:� Solution:� Case 2:� Solution:�Setting Sheet System Settings� Protection Settings� Communication Settings� DIO Settings (Digital Input/Output)� Parameter Mapping Settings� COMPlogic Settings�

USER INTERFACE� Overview� MCOMP Suite Interface Installation Guide� .NET Framework 3.5 Service Pack installation� Multi-version MCOMP Suite Installation� MCOMP Suite Installation� Operation Guide� MCOMP Suite Con�guration� Monitoring Mode� Con�guration Mode�� Display Interface Operation Guide� Metering�

6465656569696969707273747474747475767778788082

82828283838585879191115115

119120120120120122123124124125132144144145


CONTENTS

10.0

Settings � View Records � Commands � Display Settings � Connect to PC �

TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING� Overview� Testing Connection Setup Requirement� Metering testing� Phase current and voltage:� Power, Energy & Power factor:� Protection Testing�� Troubleshooting� Special Commands� Inhibit Status� Motor Stop Cause

Memory MapsOverviewA] Modbus RTU Memory Map Trip Record Table Event Record Table Table A-3. Event Record Cause TableB] Pro�bus memory map Cyclic Data Data Representation Data Modules available in GSD �le Acyclic DataC] Modbus TCP/IP Memory Map

Application NotesOverviewA] Starter Application DOL Starter RDOL Starter STAR/DELTA StarterB] Non Motor Load ApplicationC] Re-acceleration ApplicationD] 3P-3W, 3P-4W ApplicationE] Two Phase Voltage Inputs (R and Y phase input) ApplicationF] Winding Heating ApplicationG] Analog Output ApplicationH] Pro�bus Communication ApplicationI] Protection Function Application Thermal Overload Case Study Locked Rotor ProtectionJ] Watchdog ApplicationK] Single Phase Motor Application

146147148148149

150151151151151151151151152153154154

156157157169172172176176180189190192

218218218218219220221221222

223223223224227227229229231

PREFACE

1MCOMP User Manual - REV. C

Manual Overview

The MCOMP Instruction Manual provides complete information necessary to install, operate, and maintain the MCOMP Relay and its accessory components.

An overview of each section of this manual is as follows:

Preface: Describes the manual organization, Safety & General Information and conventions & nomenclatures used in this manual.

Introduction: Provides a brief overview of the product and the manual.

Speci�cations: Lists the Relay technical speci�cations.

Installation: Describes mechanical installation and electrical wiring of the Relay.

Metering and Monitoring: Describes the operation and calculation of each metering functions.

Protection: Describes the operating characteristics of each protection element provided in the Relay.

Communication: Describes communication interface and protocols supported by the Relay.

Settings: Describes the different setting parameters meaning with its use and how to enter settings into the relay. It also de�nes the setting sheet describing all the settings available in the relay.

User Interface: Describes how to con�gure the Relay through local interface using MCOMP Suite and the Display.

Testing and Troubleshooting: Describes the common problems encountered during the Relay testing and various troubleshooting techniques.

Version

This is revision C release of the manual by Larsen & Toubro Ltd.

Purpose of This Manual

This manual intends to help the users of the MCOMP Relay, to operate, maintain and troubleshoot the device. It may be used by following users:

� Design and Planning Engineers

� System Integrators

� Maintenance Engineers

Safety and General Information

This manual uses following safety statements:

Conventions and Nomenclature

Conventions

In this manual,

� Relay refers to MCOMP Main Unit

� Display Unit refers to MCOMP Display Unit

� CM refers to MCOMP Current Module

� Expansion unit refers to add-on DIO/AI unit


PREFACE

Immediate Hazard.SEVERE personal injury or death WILL result.

Hazards or unsafe practices. MINOR personal injury or damage to products orproperty MAY result.

Hazards or unsafe practices.SEVERE personal injury or death MAY result.

Essential advisory information.

Additional or explanatory information.

IMPORTANT

NOTE

WARNING

DANGER

CAUTION


Nomenclatures

Following are the different Nomenclature and their descriptions used in this Manual.

Table 1-1: Nomenclature and Description

PREFACE

Nomenclatures Descriptions

CAT

CBCT

CM

CRC

DCS

DHCP

DI

DIN

DIO

DO

DOL

DP

DTE

EEPROM

EWS

FS

GSD

GMT

IEF

IFLC

IOC

IR

ISET

Category

Core Balance Current Transformer

Current Module

Cyclic Redundancy Check

Distributed Control System

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

Digital Input

German Institute for Standardization

Digital Input/Output

Digital Output

Direct On Line

Decentralized Peripherals

Data Terminal Equipment

Electrically Erasable and Programmable Read Only Memory

Engineering Work Station

System Frequency

General Station Description

Greenwich Mean Time

Set Value for Earth Fault Current

Full Load Current

Instantaneous Over Current

Running Current

Set Value for Over load curve

LCS

LED

LRC

LSB

MFLA

MSB

OLED

Local Control System

Light Emitting Diode

Longitudinal Redundancy Check

Least Significant Bit

Multiple of Full Load Current

Most Significant Bit

Organic Light Emitting Diode

PTC

PWR/COMM

RDOL

Positive Temperature Coefficient

Power/Communication

Reverse Direct On Line

RMS Root Mean Square


PREFACE

Suggestions for Improving this Manual

For any feedback to improve this manual and its contents, kindly contact at [email protected].

Table 1-1: Nomenclature and Description

SCADA

SNTP

TCC

TCP/IP

TM

Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition

Simple Network Time Protocol

Trip Curve Characteristics

Transfer Control Protocol/Internet Protocol

Thermal Memory

RTD

RTU

Resistance Temperature Detector

Remote Terminal Unit

INTRODUCTION


About the Relay

MCOMP is designed as a reliable building block for Motor Control Centres (MCCs) and a product designed to provide complete motor protection. It covers conventional & advanced motor protection, metering and annunciation in MCC feeders into single, easy to con�gure, compact communicating module with a optional OLED Display. The MCOMP is used as a protection controller for Low Voltage Contactor Controlled Motor Starter Feeders.

Reasons for Motor Protections

Electric motors are the major operands of any industry. These motors come in with a wide variety of ratings, types and applications. Depending on the criticality of the process or application, the motor protection is selected.

Motor Protection is required for the following reasons:

Varying Input Voltages and Load Currents

� Motor is a rotating equipment and its performance is dependent on the availability of tolerable levels of input voltages and variable loads. Faults occur when either of these parameters �uctuates. Therefore, motor protection controllers

are designed to monitor key parameters of the motor to alert the operator of a condition of outage or damage.

Varying Starting Condition

� The protection controller must be able to differentiate between starting condition and running condition.

� During starting condition, a LV motor (up to 300 KW) has starting current of about 550-700 % of its full load current, with a starting time usually ranging from 1 to 10 seconds.

� It should be able to monitor pre-start conditions of the motor to prevent starting of motor under unfavorable conditions like inadequate thermal capacity available and voltage unhealthiness.

� It should check the pre-start, starting and running conditions of the motor completely for safe operation of the motor.

MCOMP as a Microprocessor Equipped Intelligent Controller, allows a user to set parameters of the motor according to the application and process requirements.

Based on the instantaneous measurement of the parameters, MCOMP monitors different conditions of the motor as shown in Table 2-1.


INTRODUCTION

Table 2-1: Motor Conditions

Condition of Motor Possible Irregularities

Prevents starting of the motor on under-voltage lockout.

Prevents starting of the motor until the thermal memory(thermal capacity) falls below a certain value.

Prevents starting of the motor until a inhibit period is elapsed.

Prevents starting of the motor until it is reset.

Relay trips the motor due to Excessive Start Time protection.

Action by MCOMP

Relay stops the motor due to contactor feedback fault whenone of the DI is configured as feedback.

Prevents starting of the motor until Stop Input is high.

Relay indicates an alarm and trips the motor if theirregularity continues for an amount of time due tothe corresponding protection.

Relay indicates alarm and trips the motor if the irregularitycontinues for set amount of time (or instantaneous) due tothe corresponding protection.

Pre-start: Before themotor starts (inhibitconditions)

Starting: After STARTinput is given or issensed till the motorpicks up speed

Running: Motor runsin a stable manner

Starting and runningconditions

Under-voltage on the supply side.

Not cooled enough for next start.

Frequent starting / Number of starts per defined time

Not reset after Trip

Exceed set starting time

Contactor feedback is not available even after STARTcommand is given for a specified amount of time.

Any of the Digital Input is selected as Stop Input,and is low.

Over-heating of the winding and insulation (Overload).

Jamming (Locked Rotor).

Supply voltage goes low.

Current is considerably lower than the running current.

Leakage current flows in the motor (Earth Fault).

Supply frequency is not proper (under and over-frequency).

One of the supply phases is disconnected (Phase Loss).

Number of starts exceeds permitted number within acertain period.

Sequence of the 3-phase supply is changed (Phase Reversal).


INTRODUCTION

Product Overview

The MCOMP facilitates following bene�ts to users:

� Flexible protection, control and communication options to suit any Low Voltage (LV) contactor controlled motor starter application.

� Integrated push button and LED indicators reduce external components and wiring.

� Flexibility to choose from various standard communication protocols allow affordable integration to larger and complex Substation monitoring & control systems.

� The Relay comes with its own high accuracy current module eliminating the three conventional CTs required for each phase. The built in 4-20 mA Analog Output eliminates the

need of transducer for remote metering. This reduces the overall module size making it more compact and cost effective.

� Reset push button is available on the Relay and the Display thereby reducing the need for one DI to be con�gured as Reset (Auto reset option is available for thermal overload and under-voltage protection).

� The optional OLED Display is provided with the Relay for display of all metering, protection and setting parameters.

� Conformal coating on the PCB inside the Relay resists the corrosive environment, hazardous chemicals, dust, etc,. and increases the life & reliability of the product.

Relay Main unit

This is a self-contained and fully functional unit housing the main

processor, input/output board, voltage sensing module and communication module in a single modular enclosure. The current module gets connected to the Relay unit for current sensing. The Relay is further provided with bi/tri color LED indicators. There is also a reset push button available for local trip reset.

There are mainly three variants of the Relay main unit depending on selection of communication protocol:

1. Modbus RTU

2. Pro�bus

3. Modbus TCP/IP

Refer MCOMP order codes section for all possible variants of MCOMP relay.

Table 2-2 shows the LED status description.

LED Indications on Main unit

One LED for Fault:

� Glows Red when the Relay senses Trip condition.

One Tri-color LED for Motor status RUN/STOP/INHIBIT

� Glows Green when the Relay senses the motor is OFF and ready to START.

� Glows Red when the Relay senses the motor is ON.

� Glows Amber when the Relay senses the motor is in INHIBIT mode.

One Bi-color LED for Alarm/Pickup

� Glows Amber when Alarm condition is sensed by the Relay.

� Glows Red when Pickup condition is sensed by the Relay.

Figure 2.1 � Product overview

Expansion DIO UnitDisplay Unit

CM Unit

Relay Main Unit

FRC Cable

Display Cable

Expansion Unit Cable

Drive LED�s

Status of the Drive Drive Status Alarm/Pick up Trip

Running

Alarm

Pickup

Trip

Inhibit

Ready to Start

RED

X

X

AMBER

AMBER

GREEN

X

AMBER

RED

OFF

X

X

OFF

OFF

OFF

RED

X

OFF


INTRODUCTION

Table 2-2: LED Status Description

Reset Button

� Resets the Trip condition of the Relay.

� Resets the Relay to default settings when pressed for 3 seconds and released.

Table 2-3: CM Type and Range

CM Type IFLC Range Motor Rating for 415V System

CM - 1

CM - 2

CM � 3

CM � 4

CM - 5

With external conventional CT

0.6 to 2.0 A

1.8 to 5.4 A

4.5 to 13.5 A

12.6 to 37.8 A

36 to 80 A

50* to 600 A

0.375 to 1.125 kW

1 to 3 kW

2.5 to 7.5 kW

7 to 21 kW

20 to 45 kW

Up to 333 kW

Current Module (CM)

CM, provided with MCOMP, is used for 3-phase current sensing in motor starters ranging from 0.375 kW. Requisite connecting cable for connection of CM to the Relay is supplied along with the CM. Only one CM is required (up to 45 kW) for metering and protection, reducing the space which is required for conventional CTs in the module.

There are two different sizes of CM, covering �ve different current ranges as shown in Table 2�3.

Display unit

The OLED Display is a detachable optional unit provided with the MCOMP for display of metering, protection and motor-speci�c parameters. The Display can additionally be used to con�gure the Relay. The OLED Display is also provided with micro-USB front port to enable local parameterization through laptop using MCOMP Suite provided with the Relay.

DIO Expansion unit

The DIO Expansion unit is detachable optional unit provided with MCOMP for increasing the count of Digital/Analog input and digital output as per application requirement. The expansion unit comes in three types as 4DI/2DO module having 4 digital inputs & 2 digital outputs, 5DI/2AI module having 5 digital inputs & 2 analog inputs and 8DI module having 8 digital inputs. Depending on the requirement of number of DI/DO or AI, suitable expansion module can be selected. The requisite connection cable of 0.4m length comes along with expansion module. Maximum three expansion modules can be connected to a single relay main unit. Refer table 8-10 in chapter Settings for details of all possible combination of DIO expansion unit connection to relay main unit.

Note: *When MCOMP is used with external conventional CT, it is required to enable the �external CT ratio� setting. In this case the starting range for IFLC is 50% of the �primary current value� set in the �external CT ratio� setting. 50A mentioned in Table 2-3 is considering the by default primary current as 100A in external CT ratio setting. If primary current value changes, starting IFLC value changes accordingly.

While selecting CM, it is strictly recommended to match the IFLC of the motor speci�ed by motor manufacturer with CM IFLC range.

Motor rating in kW speci�ed above is with considering approximate scale factor of 1.8 between motor rating and IFLC. For IFLC range higher than 80A, conventional CTs are required along with MCOMP CM. CM1 and CM2 is used when secondary of conventional CT is 1 A and 5 A respectively.

Note: X � Does not matter


INTRODUCTION

LED Indications on Expansion unit

One LED for Power (PWR):

� Glows Green when the expansion unit gets power from relay main unit.

One LED for Communication status (COMM):

� Glows Red when communication between the Relay main unit and expansion module is healthy.

LED�s for DI/DO status:

� Glows Red when corresponding DI/DO status is high / energized state.

Test Button (T):

� Tests the DI/DO circuitry and corresponding LEDs by switching it ON and OFF. It is recommended to use this button only when drive is in stop condition and 3 phase voltage is not available to the drive/motor.

MCOMP Order Codes

Part number selection MCOMP MAIN UNIT PART NUMBER

MCOMP_MAIN_UNIT_U_P_YI_R

Universal (80 � 230 V AC/DC)

24 V DC

Modbus RTU

Modbus TCP/IP

Profibus DP


230 V AC/DC

110 V AC/DC

24 V DC

RTD Input PortPTC Input Port

U

O

D

P

R

T

P

YI

UI

YI

ZI

DI

R

RP

MAIN UNIT

Auxiliary Voltage

Communication

Voltage sensing forDigital Input Card

Temperature Input

Part number selection MCOMP CURRNET MODULE PART NUMBER

MCOMP_CURRENT_MODULE_C1_H

Cable of 0.3 mCable of 0.5 mCable of 0.75 m

cable of 1 m

C1

C1

C2

C3

C4

C5

HCURRENT MODULE

CM Type

CM � Main unit Cable

Table 2-4: Main unit order code

Table 2-5: Current Module order code

S H M 1

CM Type 1 ( Iflc : 0.6 � 2 A)

CM Type 2 ( Iflc : 1.8 � 5.4 A)

CM Type 3 ( Iflc : 4.5 � 13.5 A)

CM Type 4 ( Iflc : 12.6 � 37.8 A)

CM Type 5 ( Iflc : 36 � 80 A)


INTRODUCTION

Part number selection MCOMP DISPLAY UNIT PART NUMBER

D1

D1

D2

DISPLAY UNIT

Auxiliary Voltage

MCOMP_DISPLAY_UNIT_D1_1


24 V DC

Cable of 0.5 m

Cable of 1 m

Cable of 2 m

Display � Main unit Cable

1

H

1

2

Table 2-6: Display Unit order code

Table 2-7: Expansion Unit order code

Part number selection MCOMP MAIN UNIT PART NUMBER

MCOMP_EXPANSION_UNIT_A_YI_H

4DI/2DO Expansion Unit

8DI Expansion Unit

5DI/2AI Expansion Unit


230 V AC/DC

110 V AC/DC

24 V DC

Cable of 0.4 m

A

A

B

C

H

H

EXPANSION UNIT

Module Type

Voltage sensing forDigital Input Card

Expansion � Mainunit cable

YI

UI

YI

ZI

DI

Table 2-8: Accessories order code

Part number selection MCOMP LOOSE CABLE PART NUMBER

MCOMP_LOOSE_CABLE_BB

ACCESSORIES/LOOSE CABLES

Cable Type Display � Main unit cable of 0.5 mDisplay � Main unit cable of 1.0 mDisplay � Main unit cable of 2.0 m

CM � Main unit cable of 0.5 mCM � Main unit cable of 1.0 m

Expansion � Main unit cable of 0.4 mCM - Main unit cable of 0.3 mCM - Main unit cable of 0.75 m

ABCDEFGH

Note: While selecting CM, it is strictly recommended to match the IFLC of the motor speci�ed by motor manufacturer with CM IFLC range. For IFLC range higher than 81A, conventional CTs are required along with MCOMP CM. CM1 and CM2 is used when secondary of conventional CT is 1 A and 5 A respectively.

While selecting main unit, 24 VDC voltage digital input card can be selected only if auxiliary voltage is selected as 24 VDC.

Above selection of MCOMP units and accessories is applicable for �at lid (ZX8* series CAT numbers) MCOMP relays. Ordering information of earlier version of MCOMP units and CM units with dimensions 67 x 59.3 x 55 (D x W x H) for CM-1 module & 109.2 x 107.8 x 60 for CM 2-5 modules is available upon request.


INTRODUCTION

Getting Started

For understanding the full functionality of the Relay a basic knowledge is required. It includes powering-up the Relay, setting date & time for recording of events/trips records.

The steps to be followed are shown below:

1. For powering-up the Relay, check for the power supply requirement mentioned on the side label: 80-240 V AC/DC or 24 V DC.

2. Check for polarity of power supply as L/+ (Relay terminal 72/Display terminal 75) and N/- (Relay terminal 71/Display terminal 76) on the Relay/ Display.

3. Once powered on, the motor status LED on the Relay and PWR/COMM LED on the Display glows.

4. If Display is present in the system, ensure a proper connection is established between the Relay and the Display. After connection, the Display shows L&T logo screen followed by metering screen within 3 seconds. This ensures healthy communication between the Relay and the Display.

5. Set date and time of the Relay from Display Menu (Refer System Settings in chapter User Interface) or from special commands in MCOMP Suite (Refer Special Commands in chapter User Interface).

SPECIFICATIONS



SPECIFICATIONS

General

Full Load Current Setting (IFLC)

Setting Range

Rated Voltage Setting (VL-L)

Setting Range

Power Supply

Aux Supply Voltage

Operational Aux Supply Voltage

Power Consumption

0.6 - 600 A

380 � 800 V

For universal Aux supply:

AC: 110 - 240V

DC: 110 - 220V

For 24 VDC Aux supply:

24 VDC

For universal Aux supply:

AC: 70-265 VAC,

DC: 93-265 VDC

For 24 VDC Aux supply:

18-28 VDC

Main unit:

For universal Aux supply : ~ 20VA or 20W

For 24 VDC Aux supply : ~ 18W

(Above power consumption values are including two expansion units connected to main unit)

Display unit:

For universal Aux supply : ~ 5VA or 5W

For 24 VDC Aux supply : ~ 5W

Frequency and Phase Sequence (settable)

System Frequency 50 or 60 Hz

Phase Sequence RYB or RBY

Digital Inputs

Inputs Optically Isolated

Sensing Range (current consumption andsure-ON voltage of DI channel)

Sure On voltages (AC):

1] 60-240 V AC/DC card = 63VAC (3mA)

2] 110 V AC/DC card = 73VAC (3mA)

3] 240V AC/DC card = 144VAC (2.5mA)

Sure On voltages (DC):

1] 60-240 V AC/DC card = 75VDC (3mA)

2] 110 V AC/DC = 80VDC (3.1mA)

3] 240V AC/DC = 184VDC (2.6mA)

4] 24V DC = 18VDC (2.2mA)

Sure Off voltages (AC):

1] 60-240 V AC/DC card = 53VAC

2] 110 V AC/DC card = 61VAC

3] 240V AC/DC card = 122VAC

Sure Off voltages (DC):

1] 60-240 V AC/DC card = 65VDC

2] 110 V AC/DC = 71VDC

3] 240V AC/DC = 168VDC

4] 24V DC = 16VDC

Table 3-1 (1): General Speci�cations


SPECIFICATIONS

Digital Output Contacts

Base unit have all Form C contacts

Expansion unit have all Form A contacts

Rated Current 10 A on 240 V AC

10 A on 24 V DC

Maximum Breaking Capacity AC 2400 VA

Life expectancy Mechanical: 10,000,000 operations min. (at 18,000 operations/hr under no load)Electrical: 100,000 operations average. (at 1,800 operations/hr under rated load)

Analog Output

Current Output

Accuracy

Max. Load

Isolation

Assignable Parameters

4 � 20 mA

±5 %

200 Ohms

2500 V

Voltage, Current, Power, Temperature, Frequency

Analog Input

Input Range

Accuracy

Resolution

Input shunt resistance

Max Input Current (Destructive)

Conversion time

4�20 mA/0�20 mA (user selectable)

±1 % of full scale value

12 bits

50 Ohms

24 mA

600 ms

Temperature Input

Input Type RTD (PT-100) or PTC Thermistor

Communication Ports

Micro-USBRJ 11 (RS 485 support)4 Terminal Screw Type (RS 485 support)DB9 ConnectorRJ 45 portProtocol

1 on display front1 for MCOMP suite/display communication1 in case of Modbus serial communication1 in case of Profibus communication1 in case of Modbus TCP/IP communicationModbus or Profibus-DP or Modbus TCP/IP

Dimensions

Table 3-2: Dimensions

Component

103.95

35

67

109.2

102

Depth (mm) Width (mm) Height (mm)

Relay

Display

CM � 1

CM � 2 to CM � 5

Expansion Unit

92

96

59.3

107.8

83

120

51

55

60

70

Table 3-1 (2): General Speci�cations

Digital output operating time Pickup time - 4.8 msDrop off time - 4.4 ms


SPECIFICATIONS

Type Tests

Tests

IEC 60068-2-1

IEC 60068-2-14

IEC 60068-2-6

IEC 60068-2-2

IEC 60068-2-30

IEC 60255-21-2

IEC 60255-5:2000(Cl. No 6.1.4)

IEC 60255-5:2000(Cl. No 6.1.3)

Standard Test Level

Cold

Temperature Cycling

Vibration

Dry Heat

Damp Heat

Shock Resistance

Bump

Enclosure Protection

Dielectric

Impulse

-20oC, 72 Hours

-20oC to 70oC, 3 hrs, 2 cycles

10 to 150 Hz, 1G

-20oC to 70oC, 3hrs

55oC, 6 cycles, 24 hrs/cycle, 95% relative humidity

30G, 18 shocks

25G, 6000 bumps

IP 41 enclosed in a panel

2kV, 1 min

4kV

IEC 61000-4-11

IEC 60255-5:2000(Cl. No 6.2.2)

IEC 61000-4-2, edition 1.2, 2001-04

Voltage Dip and Interruption

Insulation Resistance

Electrostatic Discharge Immunity

Class A

500 VDC, 5 sec

8kV air discharge 6kV contact discharge

IEC 61000-4-3Radiated RF Immunity Severity Level 3 Field Strength 10 V/m

IEC 61000-4-4

IEC 61000-4-5

IEC 61000-4-6

IEC 61000-4-18

CISPR 22 @ IEC : 2005

CISPR 22 @ IEC : 2005

Fast Transient, Burst Immunity

Surge Immunity

Conducted RF Immunity

High Frequency Disturbance Immunity

Conducted Emission

Radiated Emission

4kV @ 5kHz

4kV line-to-earth

Severity Level 3 Voltage level: 10 Vrms

1kV, 3 pulses

Certifications

Certification

ISO: Relay is designed and manufactured using ISO 9001 certified quality program.

CE: CE Mark- Low Voltage Directive, EMC Directive.

PNO: Relay is certified with PNO certificate from Profibus International for Profibus variant of the Relay.

Environmental Conditions

Environmental Conditions

Typical conditions under which the Relay is designed to operate:

Temperature

Supply Voltage Fluctuation

Relative Humidity

-20 to 70 °C (operating)

-40 to 85 °C (storage) Since the equipment consist of Electrolyticcapacitors, it is advised to Power ON the relay continuously at leastfor an hour in period of one year.

10 % of nominal voltage

5 to 95 %

Table 3-5: Environmental Conditions

Table 3-4: Certi�cations

Table 3-3: Type Tests


SPECIFICATIONS

Relay Elements

Relay Elements

20 � 100 % IFLC

5 � 30 %

Overload (49)

Setting Range

Thermal Memory Reset Value

Locked Rotor (50LR)

Setting Range

Trip Delay

150 � 1000 % IFLC

0.5 � 30 sec

Phase Reversal (47B)

Setting Range

Trip Delay

RYB or RBY

Instantaneous

Phase Loss (47A)

Trip Delay 0.1 � 30 sec

Earth Fault (50N or 50 SG)

Type

Setting Range

Trip Delay

Vector Sum or CBCT

Vector Sum = 20-500% IFLC CBCT = 0.1-20 A Primary

0.1 � 60 sec

Excessive Start Time

Setting Range

Mode

1 � 200 sec

Enable/Disable

Max Number of Starts (66)

Setting Range

Number of permissive starts

Inhibit Period

15 � 60 min

1 � 30

1 � 120 min

Under Current (37)

Setting Range

Trip Delay

30 � 85 % Ir

1 � 120 sec

Over Current (50P)

Setting Range

Trip Delay

50 � 1000 % IFLC

0.1 � 10 sec

Under Voltage (27)

Setting Range

Trip Delay

20 � 85 % VN

0.2 � 25 sec

Current Unbalance (46)

Setting Range

Trip Delay

5 � 100 % IFLC

1 � 30 sec

Table 3-6 (1): Relay Elements


SPECIFICATIONS

Voltage Unbalance (47)

Setting Range

Trip Delay

5 � 50 % VN

0.2 � 20 sec

Over Voltage (59)

Setting Range

Trip Delay

101 � 130 % VN

0.2 � 25 sec

Under Frequency (81L)

Setting Range

Trip Delay

94 � 98 % FS

1 � 30 sec

Over Frequency (81H)

Setting Range

Trip Delay

101 � 105 % FS

1 � 30 sec

Over Frequency (81H)

Type : RTD or PTC 1 Pt-100 RTD or max. 6 PTC in series

Reacceleration (27LV)

Voltage Dip

Voltage Restoration

Restart Time

Restart Delay

20 � 90 % VN

65 � 95 % VN

0.2 � 60 sec

4 � 1200 sec

Communication Failure

Setting Range

Trip Delay

Trip only in Remote

2 � 10 sec

1 � 30 sec

Enable/Disable

Time Delayed Phase Over Current (51P) Stage 1 and Stage 2

Setting Range

Time Constant

IEC Curves

20 � 1000 % IFLC

0.5 � 600 sec

Inverse, Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse

Time Delayed Neutral Over Current (51N) Stage 1 and Stage 2

Setting Range

Time Constant

IEC Curves

20 � 1000 % IFLC

0.5 � 600 sec


Analog Input (Trip/Alarm)

Setting Range

Trip Delay

Mode of reset

0/4 � 20mA

1 � 30 sec

Local / Auto / Communication / Remote

Table 3-6 (2): Relay Elements


SPECIFICATIONS

Metering

Metering Specifications

Line Currents Measurement Range

Earth fault current measurement range

Phase Voltages Measurement Range

Line Voltages Measurement Range

Analog input measurement

System Frequency

Active, Reactive, Apparent Power

Active, Reactive, Apparent Energy

Power Factor

Thermal Capacity

Temperature Measurement Range

0 � 6000A with accuracy + 1% from 0.5 times IFLC to 1.5 times IFLC and beyond that + 5%

+ 1% or + 50mA whichever is greater

0 � 600V with accuracy + 1% up to Nominal Voltage and + 5% after nominal voltage

0 � 1000V with accuracy + 1% up to Nominal Voltage and + 5% after nominal voltage

0 / 4 � 20mA with ± 1% of full scale value up to 20mA and ±5% after 20mA till 24mA.

+ 1%

+ 5%

+ 5%

0.9 to 1 with + 2%

0.707 to 0.9 with + 3%

0.5 to 0.707 with + 5%

+ 2%

o0°C to +180°C in case of RTD, ±3 C

0� to 10K� in case of PTC

Monitoring

Monitoring Specifications

Records

Hour Meter

Operation Counters

Starting Curve

Starting Time

Starting Current

DIO Status

Stores last five event records with date and time stamp.

Stores last five trip records with date and time stamp. Record gets stored with current, voltage, temperature,frequency values present at the time of tripping.

Stores last stop cause

Records and stores last operational hours and total operation hours

Records and stores number of starts, stops and trips of the drive

Records and stores the starting characteristics of the drive

Records and stores the start time taken

Records the peak current taken during starting of the drive

Shows real time status of digital input and output of the relay

Table 3-7: Metering Speci�cations

Table 3-8: Monitoring Speci�cations

Note: The Specifications are subject to change without notice.

INSTALLATION


Overview

This section provides information about the installation of the Relay and the various connections attaching to the ports of the Relay, CM, Display and DIO Expansion Module.

The user must be familiar with all con�gurations and features in the Relay before installing, for safe installation and connection.

Mechanical Installation

This section provides description about the Mechanical

Component

103.95

35

67

109.2

102

Depth (mm) Width (mm) Height (mm)

Relay

Display

CM � 1

CM � 2 to CM � 5

Expansion Unit

92

96

59.3

107.8

83

120

51

35

35

70

Main Unit Dimensions

Figure 4-1: Main Unit Dimension


INSTALLATION

Installation of the Relay along with the dimensions and product labels. These dimensions help in identifying proper installation space for the Relay and its wiring connections.

Dimensions

The complete relay product package consists of the Relay, CM, Expansion Module and the Display. The dimensions of all the units are mentioned below. Some units may or may not be present depending on the ordering by the end user. Figure 4�1 to Figure 4�5 shows the dimensions in diagrams.

CM 1 Dimensions

Figure 4-2: CM 1 Dimensions

TOP VIEW FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW

92

120

103.95

103.

95

92

LEGENDMM

TOP VIEW

59.3

35

FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW

59.3

67

35

LEGENDMM

CM 2-5 Dimensions

Figure 4-3: CM 2-5 Dimensions


INSTALLATION


107.8

109.

2

3535

LEGENDMM

TOP VIEW107.8

35

DIO Expansion Module Dimensions

Figure 4-4: DIO Expansion Module Dimensions

Display Dimensions

Figure 4-5: Display Dimensions

TOP VIEW

96

35


96

51

35

LEGENDMM

PWR/COMM

MOTOR STATUS

ALARM/PICKUP

TRIPRST ENT

Mini USB PortLN


84

70

TOP VIEW

LEGENDMM

102

102

Product Identification Label

The product identi�cation label gives information about the product model, serial number, and revision number. It is located on the side of the units. Figure 4�6 shows format of the product identi�cation label.

Figure 4-6: Product Identi�cation Label

Relay Mounting

The Relay is mounted on 30 mm DIN Rail provided in the motor starter module. Figure 4�7 shows the Relay mounting.

Figure 4-7: Relay Mounting


INSTALLATION

Procedure:

1. Before mounting the Relay, ensure that power supply to control panel is disconnected and the relay is free from all power connections.

2. Pull the DIN Clip.

3. Position the Relay on the DIN Rail properly.

4. Push the DIN Clip to �x the Relay.

5. Follow the reverse procedure for removal of the Relay.

Mounting

Din Clip

4

Din Rail

2

3

CM Mounting

CM is mounted on the 15mm DIN Rail provided in the motor starter module. Figure 4�8 shows the mounting of CM.

Figure 4-8: CM Mounting

Din Rail

2

1

Din Clip3

Procedure:


2. Position the CM unit on the DIN Rail properly.

3. Push the DIN Clip to �x the CM unit.

4. Follow the reverse procedure for removal of the CM.

Note: Note: Mounting of Current module with increased height as compared to height mentioned in this manual requires 30mm DIN rail instead of 15mm DIN rail.

Display Mounting

The Display can be mounted in a cut-out on the front door by using mounting clips provided. The cut out dimension required is (W x H) : 92.5 x 45 mm. Figure 4�9 shows the Display Mounting.

Figure 4-9: Display Mounting

DisplayCutout


INSTALLATION

Procedure:

1. Before installation, ensure that power supply to control panel is disconnected and the relay is free from all power connections.

2. Place the Display at the respective attaching place on the cut- out of the control plate.

3. To install the Display use the mounting clips. Place the clip on the slot provided and push it towards the control plate. Or it can be directly place to the end of control plate and �t it by just pressing it on Display.

4. Follow the reverse procedure the removal of the Display.

PanelFrame

MountingClip

DIO Expansion Module Mounting

The DIO Expansion Module is mounted on 30mm DIN Rail provided in the motor starter module. Figure 4�10 shows the DIO Expansion Module installation.

Figure 4-10: DIO Expansion Module Mounting

Din Rail2

3

Din Clip

4

Procedure:

1. Before installation, ensure that power supply to control panel is disconnected and the DIO Expansion module is free from all power connections.


3. Position the DIO Expansion Module on the DIN Rail properly.

4. Push the DIN Clip to �x the DIO Expansion Module.

5. Follow the reverse procedure for removal of the DIO Expansion Module.


INSTALLATION

Electrical Installation

This section describes about the electrical installation of the Relay main unit, CM, Display and DIO Expansion module. Figure 4�11 shows the typical relay wiring diagram.

Figure 4-11: Typical wiring diagram

PWR/COMM

MOTOR STATUS

ALARM/PICKUP

TRIPRST ENT

Mini USB PortLN

CM UNIT

R Y B

CBCT

R Y BS2

S1

M

RYBN

SFU / MCCB

CONTACTOR

61 Dl1

62 Dl2

63 Dl3

64 Dl4

65 Dl5

66 Dl6

67 COM

DIG

ITA

L IN

PUTS

3 4

Y R

3-PH.VOLTAGE

1 2

N B

71

N/-

72

L/+

AUX.VOLT

CONTACTOR COIL

TRIP INDICATION

DIG

ITA

L O

UTP

UT

CO

NTA

CTS 82

8381858684888987919290

L/+

N/-

FUSE

START

STOP

RESET

RTD/PTC

Tl1 Tl2

ANALOG O/P

AO1 AO2 D+ D-

RS485

MODBUS RS485 LOOPING

4-20mA OUTPUTTO FIELD AMMETER

RTD/PTC


INSTALLATION

Relay Main Unit Wiring

VRVYVB

NEU

1

2 4

5 7

8

63A

3B

4321

Tl1Tl2

AO1AO2

L/+N/-

7271

CM C

onne

ctor

Pro�

bus

TripDrive StatusAlarm/Pick up

Reset

Disp

lay

Port

Expa

nsio

nPo

rt

67666564636261

COMl/P6l/P5l/P4l/P3l/P2l/P1

929190898887868584838281

N/C4COM4

N/04N/C3

COM3N/O3N/C2

COM2N/O2N/C1

COM1N/O1

54535251

Figure 4-12 (1): Overview of the Relay Main Unit

Table 4-2 lists the terminal description for Relay main unit. The relay main unit package consists of MCOMP main unit with its mounting din clip and terminal connectors for wire termination.

Table 4-2: Relay main unit terminal description

Label

3-Phase Reference Voltage Connector (R,Y, B, N)

Current Module Connector

Expansion Module Connector

Display/MCOMP Suite Connector

Communication Port (Modbus RTU/Profibus/Modbus TCP/IP)

Temperature Input (RTD or PTC) and Analog Output Connector

Digital Input Connector

Auxiliary Supply Connector

Digital Output Connector

2.5 sq. mm *(Screw Thread = M2.5, Tightening torque = 0.51 Nm)

Prefabricated cable

Prefabricated cable

Prefabricated cable

For Modbus � 0.5 sq. mm(Screw Thread = M2, Tightening torque = 0.2 Nm)For Profibus, TCP/IP � Respective cable with standard connector

0.5 sq. mm *(Screw Thread = M2, Tightening torque = 0.2 Nm)




Terminal Description Possible Wire Size

1

2

3A

3B

4

5

6

7

8

Note: * In case terminals 3A and 3B is present on the Relay as a combined single terminal, refer MCOMP manual revision B for wiring of such type of a relay. The wire size mentioned here may not be applicable in such case.

Figure 4-12 (2): Main unit


INSTALLATION

3 Phase Voltage Connections

Figure 4-13: 3 Phase Voltage Connections

FUSE

NLK

RYBN

3 4

Y R

3-PH.VOLTAGE

1 2

N B

71

N/-

72

L/+

AUX.VOLT

61 Dl1

62 Dl2

63 Dl3

64 Dl4

65 Dl5

66 Dl6

67 COM

DIG

ITA

L IN

PUTS

Connection to this particular terminal depends on the application of the relay. Refer Application Notes for various types of connections as per application requirement. The typical connection for this terminal in case of 3P-4W system is shown in Figure 4�13.

Procedure to wire the voltage connector:

1. Ensure that the Relay is free from all power connections.

2. Check the connector cable for proper operation.

3. Loosen the terminal screws of the connector.

4. Insert the RYBN wires (as per application requirement) in their respective terminals.

5. Tighten the terminal screws.

6. Anchor the connector by using two connector screws.

Procedure for removal of the voltage connector:


2. Loosen the two connector screws.

3. Detach the connector from the Relay.

The connection to the current input port is from the CM. Figure 4�14 shows the 3-phase current cable connection.

Procedure to wire the current connector:


2. Check the CM cable for proper operation.

3. Press the notch and insert the CM cable connector in the Relay current connector.

4. Release the notch.

Procedure for removal of the current connector:


2. Press the notch and remove the CM cable connector from the Relay current connector.


3-Phase Current Connections

61 Dl1

62 Dl2

63 Dl3

64 Dl4

65 Dl5

66 Dl6

67 COM

DIG

ITA

L IN

PUTS

CM UNIT

CB

CT

Figure 4-14: 3 Phase Current Connections


INSTALLATION

Configuration Port Connection

The Relay con�guration can be done in two ways by using:

1. Display

2. MCOMP Suite

Figure 4-16 shows the con�guration port connection using MCOMP Suite.

Procedure to wire the connector:


2. Check the Display RS485 connector cable for proper operation.

Figure 4-15: Con�guration Port Connection

61 Dl1

62 Dl2

63 Dl3

64 Dl4

65 Dl5

66 Dl6

67 COMD

IGIT

AL

INPU

TS

Figure 4-16: Con�guration Port connection using MCOMP suite

RS485CONVERTER

3. Press the notch and insert the Display RS485 cable connector in the Relay con�guration port.


Procedure for removal of the connector:


2. Press the notch and remove the Display RS485 cable connector from the Relay con�guration port.



INSTALLATION

RTD/PTC and Analog O/P Connections

Positive Temperature Coef�cient (PTC) or RTD input is directly connected to this port. PT100 is used as a temperature sensing unit. The output of PT100 will act as RTD input in the Relay and the temperature range can be measured between 0 to 180 °C.

RTD or PTC inputs in the Relay are dependent on the ordering code. For RTD/PTC input, the wire should get connected at terminal 53/TI2 and 54/TI1. If no RTD/PTC is connected, the RTD/PTC Alarm and Trip setting must be disabled.

The analog output ranges from 4-20 mA. It can be mapped to any of the parameters like 3-Phase Voltage, 3-Phase Current, Frequency, Power, etc,. This output is given to an analog meter like LCS meter (4�20 mA), DCS for monitoring, etc,. For analog output the wire should get connected at terminals 52/AO1 (+ve) and 51/AO2 (-ve). Figure 4�17 shows the cable connections.



2. Check the RTD/PTC/Analog connector cable for proper operation.

3. Loosen the terminal screws of the connector.

4. Insert the cables in their respective terminals.


6. Anchor the connector by using two connector screws.




3. Detach the connector from the Relay.

Figure 4-17: Temperature and Analog output connections

Relay

AO1 AO2

RTD/PTC

T1 TI2 D+ D-

RS485ANALOG O/P

RTD/PTCTO FIELD AMMETER4-20mA OUTPUT

MODBUS RS485LOOPING

RS485 and RJ45 are available for communication. These ports are used to communicate with the upper level systems such as EWS/DCS/SCADA on either Modbus RTU / Profibus / Modbus TCP/IP protocol. Figure 4�18 to Figure 4�26 show the communication connection with looping diagrams.

Communication Port Connection

RS485 Port Connection for MODBUS RTU

Figure 4-18: Modbus RS485 connection

Relay

AO1 AO2RTD/PTCT1 TI2

ANALOG O/PRS485 MODBUS

41 42 43 44D+D+ D- D-

MODBUS RS485LOOPING

RS485 Port Connection for PROFIBUS

Figure 4-19: Pro�bus RS485 port connection

Relay


ANALOG O/P

PROFIBUS RS485LOOPING

RS485 PROFIBUS


INSTALLATION

Figure 4-20: Modbus/Pro�bus looping connections

Relay

Relay

Relay

EWS / SCADA / DCS

Relay

41 D+

42 D+

43 D-

44 D-

Relay

41 D+

42 D+

43 D-

44 D-

Relay

41 D+

42 D+

43 D-

44 D-

D-D+

D-

D+EWSSCADADCS



2. Check the communication cable for proper operation.

3. Press the notch and insert the communication cable in the Relay communication port.




2. Press the notch and remove the cable from the Relay communication port.


RJ45 Port Connection for MODBUS TCP/IP

Figure 4-21: Modbus TCP/IP RJ 45 port connection

Relay

RJ45 PORT


ANALOG O/P

RJ45 MODBUSTCP/IP PORT


INSTALLATION

Auxiliary Power Supply Connection

Auxiliary power supply is required to power up the Relay. Universal power supply ranging from 80 to 240 V AC/DC or 24 V DC is used as an auxiliary supply. Figure 4�22 shows auxiliary supply connection.

Procedure to wire the auxiliary supply connector:


2. Loosen the terminal screws.

3. Insert the supply wires in their respective terminals. Make sure the power supply rating of the Relay before inserting the supply wires into it.


5. Anchor the auxiliary supply connector by using two connector screws.


1. Ensure that the Relay is free from all the possible power connections.


3. Remove the auxiliary supply connector from the Relay.

Figure 4-22: Auxiliary Supply connection

N / -

L / +

61 Dl1

62 Dl2

63 Dl3

64 Dl4

65 Dl5

66 Dl6

67 COM

DIG

ITA

L IN

PUTS

1 2 3 4

N B Y R

3-PH.VOLTAGE

71 72

N/- L/+

AUX.VOLT

Digital Input Connections

The Relay main unit has six DIs and one common terminal through which it senses the status of the motor and commands; and works accordingly. Six isolated digital inputs sense the voltage ranging from 60 V to 240 V AC/DC or 24 V DC and is dependent on the selected voltage sensing range during ordering of the relay. The six contact inputs can be programmed to any of the input functions such as Stop, Start, Interlock, Reset, etc,.

Figure 4�23 shows digital input connection.




3. Insert the wires in their respective terminals.


5. Anchor the DI connector cable by using two connector screws.




3. Remove the DI connector cable from the Relay.

Note: For proper sensing of Digital Inputs, the common terminal must be connected to neutral in case of AC, and to negative (-ve) in caseof DC.

Figure 4-23: Digital Input connections

61 Dl1

62 Dl2

63 Dl3

64 Dl4

65 Dl5

66 Dl6

67 COM

DIG

ITA

L IN

PUTS

N / - L / +


INSTALLATION

Digital Output Connections

The Relay main unit has four change-over potential free output contacts. These DOs have the current carrying capacity of 10 A on 240 V AC. Each change-over contact has following terminals:

N/O (Normally Open) - It is normally not connected to the common of the corresponding DO. When a DO is activated, the corresponding N/O contact is shorted to the common of that DO.

N/C (Normally Closed) - It is normally connected to the common of the corresponding DO. When a DO is activated, the corresponding N/C contact becomes open to the common of the corresponding DO.

COM - It is the common terminal available to which NO and NC terminals are connected alternately according to the activation of the corresponding output.

These outputs can be programmed to any of the output functions like alarm, trip, etc,. Figure 4�24 shows digital output connection.




3. Insert the wires in their respective terminals.


5. Anchor the DO connector by using two connector screws.


1. Make sure that the Relay is free from all the power connections.


3. Detach the DO connector from the Relay.

Figure 4-24: Digital Output connections

CM UNIT

R Y B

CBCT

R Y BS2

S1

M

RYBN

SFU / MCCB

CONTACTOR

CONTACTOR COIL

TRIP INDICATIONN / -

L / +

N / -

L / +

DIG

ITA

L O

UTP

UT

CO

NTA

CTS 82

8381858684888987919290

Current Module (CM) Wiring

Figure 4-25 shows overview of the Current Module Unit.

Table 4-3 lists the terminal description for Current module unit. The current module unit package consists of MCOMP current module unit with its mounting din clip and prefabricated FRC cable for connection with Relay main unit. The length of the cable is dependent on the ordered part number.

Figure 4-25: Current Module unit overview

Table 4-3: Current Module terminal description

CM 1 pass through dia.: 4.5 mm

CM 2-5 pass through dia.: 16 mm

0.5 sq. mm*

(Screw Thread = M2,Tightening torque = 0.2 Nm)

Prefabricated cable

Possible Wire Size/DiameterLabel

3-Phase CurrentPass through Hole

CBCT InputConnector

Current ModuleConnector

TerminalDescription

(R,Y,B)

1

2

Note: * In case separate terminal for CBCT connection is not available on CM unit, refer MCOMP manual revision B for wiring of such type of a relay. The wire size mentioned here may not be applicable in such case.


INSTALLATION

earth fault current under abnormal conditions. This is used as an input by the Relay to measure earth fault current. Figure 4�26 shows CM wiring.

� In case where external conventional CTs are required to sense the current if the motor IFLC is greater than 80 A, the connection will be as shown in Figure 4�27. Based on the secondary of external CT, MCOMP current module is selected for the required application.

Figure 4-26: Current Module connections

CM UNIT

R Y B

CBCT

R Y B

S2

S1

M

R

Y

B

N

The Relay is provided with its own CM. CM is available in 5 types.

� CM has pass through arrangement, through which the motor supply wires (R, Y and B) enters (all three wires should enter from same side) in to the CM before connecting to the motor.

� The connecting wire from CM to the Relay is of two types based on its length (0.5 m and 1 m).

� In case of sensitive earth fault, CBCT is used. The 3-phase supply to the motor passes through CBCT which senses the


INSTALLATION

Figure 4-27: External Conventional CT connections

Display Wiring

The OLED Display is an optional unit provided with the Relay to display metering, protection and drive speci�c parameters. Figure

Figure 4-28: Display front and bottom view

D-

D+

L/+ N/+

PWR/COMM

MOTOR STATUS

ALARM/PICKUP

TRIPRST ENT

Mini USB PortLN

PWR/COMM

MOTOR STATUS

ALARM/PICKUP

TRIPRST ENT

Mini USB PortLN

61 Dl1

62 Dl2

63 Dl3

64 Dl4

65 Dl5

66 Dl6

67 COM

DIG

ITA

L IN

PUTS

3 4

Y R

3-PH.VOLTAGE

1 2

N B

71

N/-

72

L/+

AUX.VOLT

CONTACTOR COIL

TRIP INDICATION

DIG

ITA

L O

UTP

UT

CO

NTA

CTS 82

8381858684888987919290

L/+

N/-

RTD/PTC

Tl1 Tl2

ANALOG O/P

AO1 AO2 D+ D-

RS485



CM UNIT

B Y R

CBCT

R Y BS2

S1

M

RYBN

SFU / MCCB

FUSE

START1

STOP

RESET

RTD/PTC

START2CONTACTOR BCONTACTOR A

1 13 3 55

2 24 4 66

EXTERNAL CT

4�28 shows the Display front and bottom view. The Display unit package consists of MCOMP

Note: Ensure that all cables (RYB) enter from single side. The Relay auto detects the CM type. Ensure power recycle of the Relay after proper connection with the CM.


INSTALLATION

Display unit along with its 4 mounting clips and Display-cable for connecting to relay main unit. The length of the Display-cable is dependent on the ordered part number.

1. Con�guration Port connection.

Con�guration port (RJ-11) is provided to communicate with the Relay. Figure 4�29 shows the con�guration port available at bottom side of the Display. A prefabricated cable comes along with the display to connect to the relay main unit.

Figure 4-29: Display con�guration port connections

2. Auxiliary Supply Connection.

An auxiliary supply is needed to power up the Display, which will get connected to the port provided at the bottom side of the Display. Figure 4�30 shows the Display auxiliary supply connection. Possible wire size for termination is 0.5 sq. mm.

Figure 4-30: Display auxiliary supply connection

D-

D+

L/+ N/+

Auxiliary Supply

D-

D+

L/+ N/+

3. Front USB Port Connection.

The OLED Display is provided with a USB port in the front. It enables local con�guration through computer/laptop using MCOMP Suite. Mini USB cable is required for the connection. Figure 4�31 shows the Display front port connection.

Figure 4-31: Display front USB port connection

PWR/COMM

MOTOR STATUS

ALARM/PICKUP

TRIPRST ENT

Mini USB PortLN

Note: * In case RJ11 port is not available on display unit, refer MCOMPmanual revision B for wiring of such type of a relay.


INSTALLATION

Expansion Unit Wiring

The DIO Expansion unit is detachable optional unit used along with MCOMP main unit for increasing the count of Digital/Analog input and digital output as per application requirement. The expansion unit comes in three types as 4DI/2DO module having 4 digital inputs & 2 digital outputs, 5DI/2AI module having 5 digital inputs & 2 analog inputs and 8DI module having 8 digital inputs. The expansion unit package consists of MCOMP expansion unit with its mounting din clip and expansion-cable of 0.4 meter for connecting to relay main unit. Refer Digital input and Digital output wiring sections in Main unit wiring for expansion DIO wiring connections.

Maximum three expansion modules can be connected to a single relay main unit provided:

� Maximum number of 4DI/2DO units allowed to be connected to main unit is 2.

� Maximum number of 5DI/2AI or 3DI/2DO/2AI units allowed to be connected to main unit is 1. 5DI/2AI unit and 3DI/2DO/2AI unit cannot be connected together to main unit.

� If 5DI/2AI or 3DI/2DO/2AI unit is connected along with 4DI/2DO or 8DI expansion unit then it should be connected as last unit in the series.

Table 4-4 lists the terminal description for various types of Expansion module units.

Table 4-5 shows all possible combination of expansion units which can be successfully connected together to the main unit.

Figure 4-32 shows MCOMP main unit and expansion unit connection representation:

DI1-DI8:

Field input connection points

DO1(1-2),DO2(3-4):

N/O Digital output connection points

AI1+/-, AI2+/-:

Analog inputs connection points

COM:

Wire neutral in case of AC digital inputs, -ve supply in

case of DC digital inputs

Expansion Module Type Label, Terminal Description and possible wire size

T:

Test push button

1,2,3,4 Dip switches:

Select module ID for expansion module as per

configuration done in relay main unit

When �1000� => module id 1



Possible wire size for all termination points: 2.5 sq. mm.

(Screw Thread = M3, Tightening torque = 0.45-0.5 Nm)

4DI/2DO Module

1 2 3 4

DO1 DO2

Dl1 Dl2 Dl3 Dl4 COM COM

T

1 2 3 4

Dip switches

8Dl Module

Dl7 COM COM Dl8


T

1 2 3 4

Dip switches

Dl5 Dl6

5Dl/2Al Module

Dl4 COM COM Dl5

Dl1 Dl2 Dl3 COM Al2+ Al2-

T

1 2 3 4

Dip switches

Al1+ Al1-

Table 4-4: Expansion Module terminal description


INSTALLATION

Table 4-5: Expansion unit connection combinations

Single unit Combination

4DI/2DO

8DI

5DI/2AI

3DI/2DO/2AI

Expansion unit 1 Expansion unit 2 Expansion unit 3

1

2

3

4

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Two unit Combination

4DI/2DO

4DI/2DO

4DI/2DO

4DI/2DO

8DI

8DI

8DI


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8DI

4DI/2DO

5DI/2AI

3DI/2DO/2AI

8DI

5DI/2AI

3DI/2DO/2AI

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Three unit Combination

4DI/2DO

4DI/2DO

8DI

8DI

8DI

8DI

8DI


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

4DI/2DO

8DI

8DI

8DI

8DI

4DI/2DO

4DI/2DO

8DI

8DI

8DI

5DI/2AI

3DI/2DO/2AI

5DI/2AI

3DI/2DO/2AI

Figure 4-32: Main unit and expansion unit connection

Relay main unit


8Dl Module

Dl7 COM COM Dl8


T1 2 3 4

Dip switches

Dl5 Dl6

8Dl Module

Dl7 COM COM Dl8


T1 2 3 4

Dip switches

Dl5 Dl6

8Dl Module

Dl7 COM COM Dl8


T1 2 3 4

Dip switches

Dl5 Dl6

VRVYVB

NEU

4321

Tl1Tl2

AO1AO2

L/+N/-

7271

CM C

onne

ctor

Pro�

bus

TripDrive StatusAlarm/Pick up

Reset

Disp

lay

Port

Expa

nsio

nPo

rt

67666564636261

COMl/P6l/P5l/P4l/P3l/P2l/P1

929190898887868584838281

N/C4COM4

N/04N/C3

COM3N/O3N/C2

COM2N/O2N/C1

COM1N/O1

54535251


METERING ANDMONITORING


METERING AND MONITORING

Overview

This chapter describes the various parameters available in the Relay for metering and monitoring. The Relay measures real-time values of Current, Voltage, Power, Analog Output, Temperature and monitors motor speci�c data like number of starts, stops, running hours, etc,.

All values measured by the Relay can be accessed using following interfaces:

� Display

� MCOMP Suite

� Communication Port

Metering

Current Based Metering

True RMS Line Current

The Relay measures RMS values of line currents (Ir, Iy and Ib) through CM.

Ir: Current �owing through R phase

Iy: Current �owing through Y phase

Ib: Current �owing through B phase

Earth Fault Current

Earth Fault Current is an unbalanced current which can be represented by vector summation. In case of 3-phase system, under healthy conditions, Earth Fault current will be zero. It is present only when Earth Fault occurs. The Relay measures the Earth Fault current in following ways.

Vector Summation

Earth Fault Current is equal to the vector sum of three line current values. It is calculated using formula:

Ie = Ir + Iy + Ib

Where Ie is Earth Fault Current.

CBCT (Core Balance Current Transformer)

CBCT is used for earth leakage and sensitive Earth Fault conditions. The 3-phase supply to the motor passes through CBCT which senses the Earth Fault current under abnormal conditions. The output of CBCT is used as an input by the Relay to measure Earth Fault current.

Average of True RMS Current

The average current is calculated using formula:

Iavg = (Ir + Iy + Ib)/3

Thermal Capacity

The Thermal Capacity is the tolerable capacity that the motor can withstand under overload condition. It is calculated internally by the Relay as per IEC 60255 curve. To calculate the Thermal Capacity, the Relay uses the IFLC of the Motor, instantaneous running current and trip class of the Motor.

Current Unbalance

Current unbalance is calculated in percentage as explained in Protection Chapter under Current Unbalance Protection. It is instantaneously available for monitoring in MCOMP suite & Display monitoring window.

Voltage Based Metering

True RMS Line Voltage

The Relay measures the RMS value of the line voltage (Vry, Vyb and Vbr).

Vry: Voltage of R phase with respect to Y phase

Vyb: Voltage of Y phase with respect to B phase

Vbr: Voltage of B phase with respect to R phase

True RMS Phase Voltage

The Relay measures phase to neutral voltages (Vr, Vy and Vb).

Vr: Voltage of R phase with respect to neutral

Vy: Voltage of Y phase with respect to neutral

Vb: Voltage of B phase with respect to neutral

Average of True RMS Voltage

Average RMS voltage is calculated using formula:

Vavg = (Vr + Vy + Vb)/3

Frequency

Relay measures the frequency of the 3-phase voltage supplied to the Motor.



Power and Energy Based Metering

Power

Active, Reactive, and Apparent Power are based on the following factors:

� 3-phase RMS phase voltage Vr,Vy,Vb

� 3-phase RMS line current Ir,Iy,Ib

� Power factor (cosφ)

Active power is also known as real power which gives the RMS value of power. It is calculated using formula:

Active Power (kW) = VrxIrxcosφx VyxIyxcosφ+ VbxIbxcosφ

Reactive Power is calculated using formula:

Reactive Power (kVAR) = VrxIrxsinφx VyxIyxsinφ+ VbxIbxsinφ

Apparent Power is calculated using formula:

Apparent Power (kVA) = (Total Active Power)² + (Total Reactive Power)²

Energy

The energy consumed by the load can be calculated using formula:

Active Energy (kWh) = Total Active Power X Number of Hours Run

Reactive Energy (kVARh) = Total Reactive Power x Number of Hours

Run

Apparent Energy (kVAh) = Total Apparent Power x Number of Hours

Run

O P Re S

S

Q

O

j(lm) S

Figure 5-1: Power Factor

Miscellaneous Parameter

Temperature

Relay measures the temperature of the Motor by using RTD or PTC inputs. RTD measures temperature in terms of degree Celsius, PTC measures temperature in terms of ohmic value.

Digital Input/Output Status

Relay shows Real time (activated or deactivated) status of Digital Input/Output.

COMPlogic output Status

Relay shows Real time (activated or deactivated) status of COMPlogic outputs (Truth tables, timer, counters etc)

Power Factor

Power Factor is the cosine of the angle between the phase currents and phase voltages. It can also be represented as the absolute value of the ratio of Active Power to Apparent Power.

Power Factor is calculated using formula:

Power Factor = Active Power / Apparent Power

Monitoring

Motor Speci�c Data Monitoring

Phase Sequence

Relay detects the phase sequence (Voltage Phase Sequence) of the 3-phase motor.

Motor Starting Time

Relay measures the actual time taken by the Motor to start. The motor starting time is measured as time taken by average current to rise from 0 A to a value above IFLC and drop back below IFLC value. Figure 5�2 illustrates the starting curve of the motor.

Figure 5-2: Starting curve of the motor

MotorCurve

Cu

rren

t (R

MS)

Pre Start Starting Time Running

IFLC

Ir



CM Type

Relay auto detects the type of CM connected to the Main Unit.

Number of Starts

Relay measures the total number of times the motor has started from the time factory settings of the Relay has been stored.

Number of Stops

Relay measures the total number of times the motor has stopped from the time factory settings of the Relay has been restored.

Motor Run Hours

Relay measures the number of hours the motor has run from the time it has last been started.

Total Motor Run Hours

Relay measures the total number of hours the motor has run from the time the Relay settings have been restored.

Starting Peak Current

It is the maximum current drawn by the motor during the starting time as shown in Figure 5�2.

Annunciations

Relay indicates healthy/unhealthy status of the motor such as Ready to start, Run, Trip, Alarm and Inhibit conditions using annunciation LEDs.


PROTECTIONS


PROTECTIONS

Pickup Set: A setting limit for the monitored parameter that triggers Pickup of a protection function. Pickup set is calculated using formula:

Pickup Set = Pickup Set in % of corresponding parameter

= (Pickup Set in %) X (Parameter Value)/100

Example: For Locked Rotor protection, the corresponding parameter is IFLC. If IFLC value is 10 A, then the corresponding parameter value will be 10 A, for Pickup Set of 150 %:

Pickup Set Value (IOC) = (150 x 10) / 100 = 15 A

Alarm Set: A limit in % for the monitored parameter that triggers a protection function alarm. Alarm Set value is calculated using formula:

Alarm Set = Alarm Set in % of corresponding parameter

= (Alarm Set in %) X (Pickup Set)/100

Example: For Locked Rotor protection, the corresponding parameter is IOC (Pickup Set). If IOC value is 15 A, then the corresponding parameter value will be 15 A and for Alarm set of 90 %:

Alarm Set value = (90 x 15) / 100 = 13.5

Hysteresis band: This setting de�nes the reset value for the alarm and pickup set values for respective protection. Hysteresis setting is categorized into three settings as current, voltage and frequency to provide alarm/pickup reset values for all current based, voltage based and frequency based protections respectively.

Pickup Reset: A setting limit for the monitored parameter that resets (removes) the Pickup condition when the corresponding monitored parameter resumes to a safe value, else the Pickup condition persists. Pickup Reset is calculated using formula:

Pickup Reset = (Pickup Set)*(100 + Hysteresis band setting)/100

Example: If pickup set value is 15 A for locked rotor protection, and if current setting in hysteresis band is 5 % then:

Pickup Reset Value = (15)*(100 - 5) / 100 = 14.25 A

Alarm Reset: A limit that resets the alarm condition when the corresponding monitored parameter resumes to a safe value, else the alarm condition persists. Alarm Reset value is calculated using formula:

Alarm Reset = (Alarm Set)*(100 + Hysteresis band setting)/100

Overview

This section provides a detailed description about the various faults possible in the motor; their causes and the preventive measures taken by the Relay to protect the motor. Alarm is an indication which requires immediate attention. It indicates a need for corrective action to prevent fault occurrence. It may result into serious implications if not noticed. The alarm-related parameters can be con�gured for most of the protection functions.

The Relay responds to an Alarm in following ways:

� The alarm gets activated upon the occurrence of any fault.

� The cause and time for the Alarm/Pickup will be recorded.

� Alarm/Pickup LED glows Amber.

� The Relay counts and records the number of Alarm/Pickup conditions.

The Relay responds to a fault in following ways:

� On the Relay, trip LED glows Red.

� On the Relay, motor status LED glows Amber.

� DO of the Relay used for starter will go LOW.

� DO of the Relay used for tripping will go HIGH.

The Relay stores the data for the cause of fault along with the parameters such as time of fault, source of fault and corresponding values of Current, Voltage, Earth Current, Temperature, Power Factor and Frequency. The Relay keeps a count for the number of faults occurred and stores �ve events & �ve trip records which can be viewed by the user at any point of time.

The Relay clears the alarm/pickup whenever the measured value drops below the Alarm/Pickup Reset threshold.

Figure 6�1 describes a typical motor protection function. This diagram is expressed in terms of a measuring parameter.

Where,

X: Measuring Parameter

Xa: Alarm threshold value

Xp: Trip set value

Parameter

Current

Voltage

Frequency

Setting Range

3 � 15 %

3 � 15 %

1 � 15 %

Step Increase

1 %

1 %

1 %

Factory Setting

3 %

3 %

3 %

Figure 6-1: Motor Protection Function

Measuring parameter (X)

X>=XPX>=Xa

Trip DelayInstantaneous

Trip Alarm

Table 4-6: Hysteresis setting


PROTECTIONS

Example: If alarm set value is 15 A for under current protection, and if current setting in hysteresis band is 5 % then:

Alarm Reset Value = (15)*(100 + 5) / 100 = 15.75 A

Trip Delay: A time limit after which the Relay issues Trip command from the time of Pickup, if condition persists.

Trip Curve Characteristic (TCC): The Relay includes a de�nite trip characteristic for all protection functions as shown in Figure 6�2, (except the Thermal Overload function, as it has inverse trip curve characteristic shown in Figure 6�3).

De�nite TCC: The duration of the fault delay remains constant irrespective of the changes in the value of the measured quantity (current), as described in the Figure 6�2.

Inverse TCC: The duration of the time delay varies inversely with the value of the measured quantity. The possibility of damage increases along with the measured quantity and thus the time delay decreases.

Note: Factory default setting is class 10 for Overload protection.

Reset modes: Reset mode allows the user to select a desirable mode to reset the trip condition. The available modes are:

� Local: Reset from MCOMP Suite or Display

� Remote: Reset through Digital Input

� Communication: Reset through Modbus RTU, Pro�bus or Modbus TCP/IP

� Auto: Automatically reset once fault is cleared

Different reset modes can be independently selected for each protection.

Protection function is classi�ed on the basis of following parameters.

� Thermal

� Current

� Voltage

� Frequency

� Miscellaneous

Thermal Protection

The fundamental protective function of the Relay is Thermal Protection. Thermal Capacity of the motor is the tolerable capacity that the motor can withstand under overload condition. In normal condition, the motor temperature will eventually stabilize at some steady state temperature (within the limit) due to �ow of steady current. Under transient and overload conditions the Thermal Capacity of the motor rises, but within the corresponding limits. When the overload persists for a considerable amount of time, the motor temperature and thermal capacity will rise. A trip occurs when the thermal capacity used by the motor reaches its 100 %.The Thermal Capacity of motor is calculated by measuring the power circuit currents.

Majority of the motor failures are due to overheating. There are many reasons for increase in the temperature and Thermal Capacity of the motor. Fault occurs mainly due to overload, operation on unbalanced condition, poor ventilation, single phasing, short circuits, Earth Fault etc,.

Overheating of the motor damages the windings hence decrease the ef�ciency and life of the motor.

Overload (49)

Overload is a condition where current higher than the rated value �ows to the motor resulting in excessive heating of the motor. Rapid motor heating occurs during the overload, acceleration time, and stall condition. The Relay gives the Overload Protection

Figure 6-2: De�nite TCC

Measuring parameter (X)

Motor Tripped

Trip Delay

XP

Figure 6-3: Inverse TCC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 91

10

100

1000

41*10

MFLA

Tim

e In

Sec

on

ds

Class 5

Class 10Class 15Class 20Class 25Class 30

Note: Auto Reset is available only for Thermal Overload and under voltage Protections.


PROTECTIONS

based on calculated Thermal Memory (TM) and gives Trip command when thermal capacity reaches its 100 %.The overload curve controls the rate of increase of the thermal capacity used whenever the equivalent motor heating current is greater than current set point. The Thermal Memory is directly proportional to ISET value, which is the overload current setting.

The Relay detects Overload condition and gives:

� An alarm when Thermal Memory reaches above the Alarm Set value.

� Trip when Thermal Memory reaches 100%.

Pause Time Delay: Pause Time Delay is a con�gurable time after which the thermal memory will be reset to zero when the Relay trips due to Overload Protection. It is effective only when pause time setting is enabled.

Thermal Memory Reset Value: It is the value of Thermal Memory at which the trip condition due to overload is reset when the Thermal Memory falls below the Thermal Memory Reset Value. This setting is effective only when auto reset functionality in case of thermal overload is enabled.

Thermal Inhibit Setting: It is the setting for which the Relay will continue to be in inhibit mode if Thermal Memory does not falls below set Thermal inhibit setting value. In inhibit mode, the relay will not detect any auto-start from current or will not allow to the start the motor in case start command is given. This setting is available for editing only through Admin mode of MCOMP suite.

Alarm Response for this protection can be separately enabled or disabled.

Table 6-1 lists the overload protection settings available in the Relay.

Table 6-1: Overload Protection Settings

The Relay thermal model follows IEC 60255 standard model. Trip time is calculated using formula:

Where,

tp: Trip time

Ir : Rated current (ISET)

τ: Time constant

k: Asymptotic Constant of value 1.15

Ip: Current just before the overload current

I: Actual running current

tp = x ln

IIr

2

IIr

2(k)

2

pIr

I 2

Figure 6-3: Inverse TCC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 91

10

100

1000

41*10

MFLA

Tim

e In

Sec

on

ds

Class 5

Class 10Class 15Class 20Class 25Class 30

Parameter Setting Range Step Increase Factory Setting

ISET

Pickup Reset

Alarm Set

Alarm Reset


Thermal Inhibit Setting

Alarm

Pause Setting

Pause Time Delay

Reset Modes

100 % of IFLC

95

95%

20 %

33 %

Enable

Off

Local

20 � 100 % of IFLC

80 � 100 % of TM

5 � 30 %

30 � 95 %

1 � 1200 sec

5 % of IFLC

5 % of TM

5 %

1 %

1 sec

As per Hysteresis band


Enable or Disable

On or Off

Local, Remote, Communication, Auto


PROTECTIONS

Table 6-2 (1): Trip Delay as per Trip Class

Multipleof ISET

Trip Class (as per 60947-4 Standard)

5 10 15 25 30 35 4020

1.151

1.2

1.25

1.3

1.4

1.5

1.6

1.7

1.8

1.9

2.0

2.25

2.5

2.75

3.0

3.25

3.5

3.75

4.0

4.25

4.5

851.68

335.82

251.04

204.46

150.52

118.76

97.42

81.98

70.3

61.14

53.8

40.58

31.86

25.76

21.3

17.94

15.32

13.24

11.58

10.2

9.06

1703.54

671.68

502.14

408.96

301.04

237.54

194.84

163.98

140.6

122.3

107.6

81.16

63.74

51.54

42.6

35.86

30.64

26.48

23.14

20.4

18.12

2555.4

1007.56

753.24

613.46

451.58

356.32

292.28

245.98

210.92

183.46

161.4

121.74

95.5

77.3

63.92

53.8

45.94

39.72

34.7

30.58

27.16

4259.12

1679.32

1255.42

1022.46

752.66

593.88

487.14

409.98

351.52

305.76

269

202.9

159.34

128.82

106.52

89.66

76.56

66.2

57.82

50.96

45.26

5110.98

2015.2

1506.52

1226.96

903.2

712.64

584.56

491.98

421.84

366.9

322.8

243.48

191.2

154.58

127.82

107.58

91.88

79.44

69.38

61.16

54.32

5962.84

2351.08

1757.62

1431.46

1053.74

831.42

682

573.98

492.14

428.06

376.6

284.08

223.06

180.36

149.12

125.5

107.2

92.68

80.96

71.34

63.38

6814.7

2686.96

2008.72

1635.96

1204.28

950.2

779.42

655.95

562.44

489.2

430.42

324.66

254.94

206.12

170.42

143.44

122.5

105.9

92.52

81.54

72.42

3407.26

1343.44

1007.34

817.96

602.12

475.1

389.7

327.98

281.22

244.6

215.2

162.32

127.46

103.06

85.22

71.72

61.62

52.96

46.26

40.78

36.22

4.75

5.0

5.25

5.5

5.75

6.0

6.25

6.5

6.75

7.0

7.25

7.5

7.75

8.1

7.3

6.6

6

5.48

5.02

4.62

4.28

3.96

3.68

3.42

3.2

3

16.2

14.58

13.18

12

10.96

10.04

9.24

8.54

7.9

7.34

6.84

6.38

5.98

24.3

21.86

19.78

17.98

16.42

15.06

13.86

12.8

11.86

11.02

10.26

9.58

8.96

40.48

36.44

32.96

29.96

27.36

25.1

23.1

21.32

19.74

18.34

17.08

15.96

14.94

48.58

43.72

39.56

35.92

32.84

30.1

27.7

25.58

23.7

22.02

20.5

19.14

17.92

56.68

51

46.14

41.96

38.3

35.12

32.32

29.84

27.64

25.68

23.92

22.34

20.9

64.78

58.28

52.74

47.94

43.78

40.14

36.94

34.1

31.6

29.34

27.34

25.52

23.88

32.4

29.14

26.38

23.98

21.9

20.08

18.48

17.06

15.8

14.68

13.68

12.76

11.94

The tripping time depends on the trip class set in the Relay (class 5 to class 40), which de�nes time duration the Relay will take to

trip, as shown in Figure 6�3, and numerically represented byTable 6�2.


PROTECTIONS

8.0

8.25

8.5

8.75

9.0

9.25

9.5

9.75

10.0

10.25

2.8

2.64

2.48

2.34

2.22

2.1

1.98

1.88

1.8

1.7

5.6

5.26

4.96

4.68

4.42

4.18

3.96

3.76

3.58

3.4

8.4

7.9

7.44

7.02

6.62

6.28

5.94

5.64

5.36

5.1

14

13.16

12.38

11.68

11.04

10.44

9.9

9.4

8.94

8.5

16.8

15.78

14.86

14.02

13.24

12.54

11.88

11.28

10.72

10.2

19.6

18.42

17.34

16.36

15.46

14.62

13.86

13.16

12.5

11.9

22.4

21.04

19.82

18.7

17.66

16.72

15.84

15.04

14.28

13.6

11.2

10.52

9.92

9.36

8.84

8.36

7.92

7.52

7.14

6.8

Table 6-2 (2): Trip Delay as per Trip Class

Note: Thermal Overload protection is always enabled and cannot be disabled in case of motor feeder.At any given time while motor is in running condition, if Thermal Memory reaches 100 %, the relay issues a trip command.

Current Based Protection

Over current Protection (50P)

Over current fault is a condition where the current through the conductor (power circuit) exceeds its preset value. This fault is usually caused due to short circuit, load increase, improper connection, or ground fault.

The Relay detects Overcurrent condition and gives:

� An alarm when current in any of the 3-phases reaches above the Alarm Set value.

� Pickup when current in any of the 3-phases reaches above the pickup value and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after the Trip delay.

Table 6�3 lists the Over current Protection settings available inthe Relay.

Under current Protection (37)

Under current fault is a condition where the current through the conductor (power circuit) reaches below its rated minimum value. Under current condition is observed mainly during No-load. Table 6�4 lists the Undercurrent Protection settings available in the Relay.

The Relay detects Undercurrent condition and gives:

� An Alarm when current in any of the 3-phases goes below the Alarm set value.

� Pickup when current in any of the 3-phases reaches below the pickup value and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after the Trip delay.

Note: At Starting time of the motor Overcurrent is disabled.Trip and Alarm Responses for Overcurrent can be separately con�gured through MCOMP suite or Display

Table 6-3 (1): Overcurrent Protection Settings

Multipleof ISET

Trip Class (as per 60947-4 Standard)

5 10 15 25 30 35 4020

Parameter Setting range

Pickup Set

Pickup Reset

Alarm Set

Alarm Reset

Trip Delay

50 � 1000 % of IFLC

As per hysteresis band

90% of pickup set


0.1 to 10 sec

StepIncrease

FactorySettings

50%

0.1 sec

100%

95

90%

85

0.1 sec

Alarm Enable or Disable Disable

Trip

Reset Modes

Enable or Disable

Local, Remote,Communication

Disable

Local

Parameter Setting range StepIncrease

FactorySettings

Table 6-3 (2): Overcurrent Protection Settings


PROTECTIONS

Note: Undercurrent protection is disabled for the set starting time in the Relay. Trip and Alarm Responses for Undercurrent can be separately con�gured through MCOMP suite or Display. Under current Protection will be inactive for current less than 10 % of the set full load current.

Earth Fault Protection (50N or 50SG)

Earth current calculation is done in two ways in the Relay.

1. Vector Summation

Earth Fault current is equal to the vector sum of the three line current values. It is calculated using formula:

Ie = Ir + Iy + Ib

Where,

Ie : Earth Fault current

Ir : Current �owing through R phase

Iy: Current �owing through Y phase

Ib: Current �owing through B phase

2. CBCT (Core Balance Current Transformer)

CBCT is used for earth leakage and sensitive Earth Fault conditions. The 3-phases supply to the motor passes through the CBCT which senses the Earth Fault current under abnormal conditions. The output of CBCT is used as an input by the Relay to measure Earth Fault current. It is recommended to use Manufacturer's supplied specially designed CBCT of ratio 2000:1 for MCOMP relay.

The Relay detects the Earth Fault condition and gives:

� An alarm when earth current reaches above the Alarm Set value.

� Pickup when earth current reaches above the pickup value and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after the Trip delay.

Current unbalance Protection (46)

Current unbalance is a condition where the current in the 3-Phases differs in magnitude. Current unbalance is usually caused due to load unbalance or improper motor windings. Large motors can sustain minor current unbalance in the circuit, but small motors cannot.

Current unbalance in the 3-phase circuits induces negative sequence current, which generates negative torque causing themotor to heat up. Negative sequence current affects the rotor by increasing the copper losses and overheating. Current unbalance also causes pulsating magnetic �eld in the stator which results in uneven force at the bearings thereby damaging the motor. Hence it decreases the ef�ciency and life of the motor. Table 6�5 lists the Current unbalance Protection settings available in the Relay.

The Relay detects Current unbalance condition and gives:

� An Alarm when unbalance of 3-phase currents goes above the Alarm set value.

� Pickup when unbalance of 3-phase current reaches above the pickup value and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after the Trip delay.

Current unbalance is calculated using formula:

1. When Imax > 80 % IFLC: It is unbalanced if

(Imax � Imin) / Imax > Unbalance Set Value

2. When Imax < 80 % IFLC: It is unbalanced if

(Imax � Imin) / IFLC > Unbalance Set Value

Where,

Imax: Maximum current of the 3-phases current

Imin: Minimum current of the 3-phases current

IFLC: Full load current

Trip

Reset Modes

Enable or Disable


Enable

Local

Table 6-4: Undercurrent Protection Settings


Pickup Set

Pickup Reset

Alarm Set

Alarm Reset

Trip Delay

30 � 85 % of IR


110% of pickup set


1 to 120 sec

StepIncrease

FactorySettings

5%

1 sec

50%

110%

10 sec

Alarm Enable or Disable Enable

Trip

Reset Modes

Enable or Disable


Enable

Local

Table 6-5: Current Unbalance Protection Settings


Pickup Set

Pickup Reset

Alarm Set

Alarm Reset

Trip Delay

50 � 100 %


85-100% of pickup set


1 to 30 sec

StepIncrease

FactorySettings

5%

1 sec

50%

90%

1 sec


5%

Note: Trip and Alarm Responses for Current Unbalance can be separately con�gured through MCOMP suite or Display.

Table 6�6 lists the Earth Fault Protection settings available in the Relay.


PROTECTIONS

Note: Trip and Alarm Responses for Earth Fault can be separately con�gured through MCOMP suite or Display.In case of Vector Summation (VS), settings will be in % of IFLC and in case of CBCT, settings will be in absolute amperes.

Parameter Setting range StepIncrease

FactorySettings

Table 6-6: Earth Fault Protection Settings

Vector Sum or CBCT

20 � 500 % of IFLC

90 % of IEF

0.1 � 60 sec

0.1 � 20 A

0.1 � pickup set

0 � 60 sec

0 � 25 sec

0 � 60 sec

0 � 60 sec

5 %

0.1 sec

0.1

0.1

0.1 sec

0.1 sec

1 sec

1 sec

VectorSum

25 %

90 %

5 sec

1 A

5 sec

5 sec

1 sec

1 sec

Enable

Enable

Local

Earth FaultType

Pickup Set(VS)

Pickup Reset(VS)

Alarm Set(VS)

Alarm Reset(VS)

Trip Delay(VS)

Pickup Set(CBCT)

Pickup Reset(CBCT)

Alarm Set(CBCT)

Alarm Reset(CBCT)

Trip DelayRun (CBCT)

Trip DelayStart (CBCT)

Alarm DelayStart (CBCT)

Alarm DelayRun (CBCT)

Alarm

Trip

Reset Mode



As per Hysteresis Band

As per Hysteresis Band

Enable or Disable

Enable or Disable

Local, Remote, Communication

Locked Rotor Protection (50LR)

Locked rotor condition can arise during motor starting time or in motor running condition. Stalling in starting time is taken care by separate Excessive start time protection. Load jam in motor running condition is taken care by Locked rotor (50LR) protection available in the Relay.

Locked Rotor current: The current drawn by the motor, when the rotor is locked under full voltage condition. Rotor stalling is mainly due to improper connection between the shaft and rotor, over load etc,.

In Locked Rotor condition, the rotor gets locked due to presence of the excessive load. As a result, the motor draws higher current to drive the excessive load. The high current �ow in the motorheats up the rotor quickly due to skin effect.

The Relay detects jamming of the motor after starting time and gives:

� An Alarm when current in any of the 3-phases reaches above the Alarm Set value.

� Pickup when current in any of the 3-phases reaches above the pickup value and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after the Trip delay.

Table 6�7 lists the Locked Rotor Protection settings available in the Relay.

Trip

Reset Modes

Enable or Disable


Enable

Local

Table 6-7: Locked Rotor Protection Settings


Pickup Set

Pickup Reset

Alarm Set

Alarm Reset

Trip Delay


90% of pickup set


0.5 to 30 sec

StepIncrease

FactorySettings

50%

0.1 sec

400%

90%

5 sec


Note: Locked rotor protection is disabled for the set starting time in the Relay. Trip and Alarm Responses for Locked Rotor can be separately con�gured through MCOMP suite or Display

150 � 1000 % of IFLC

IDMT Overcurrent (51P/51N)

This protection functions when the AC input current exceeds a predetermined value, and in which the input current & operating time are inversely related to a substantial portion of the performance range. The time to trip is derived from standard Time Inverse Curves. Two stages of IDMT over current settings are available, which can be enabled individually or all at once, depending on the requirement. Available Curve types are IEC curves as: Inverse, Very Inverse and Extremely Inverse.

Note: The working function remains the same for IDMT Phase Over current Stage 1, IDMT Phase Over current Stage 2, IDMT Neutral Over current Stage 1, IDMT Neutral Over current Stage 2.Trip and Alarm Responses for Overcurrent can be separately con�gured through MCOMP suite or Display.


PROTECTIONS

Table 6-8: IDMT formula

Curve Type Operating TimeEquation

α

0.02

1

2

Inverse

Very Inverse

Extremely Inverse

k

0.14

13.5

80

t = TMSkI

I Pickup( )a[ ]

t = TMSkI

I Pickup( )a[ ]

Table 6-8 enlists constant values for IEC curves for dependent time operating characteristics.

Where,

t: Theoretical operate time in seconds

k, α: Constants characterizing the selected curve

I: Measured value of the characteristic quantity

I Pickup : Setting value

TMS: Time Multiplier Setting, Time Constant

The constants, k has a unit of seconds, and α has no dimension. Table 6-9 enlists the IDMT Over current settings available in the Relay.

Table 6-9: IDMT Overcurrent Protection Settings

Trip

Reset Modes

Enable or Disable


Disable

Local


Pickup Set

Pickup Reset

Alarm Set

Alarm Reset

Time Constant


90% of pickup


0.5 to 600 seconds

StepIncrease

FactorySettings

5%

0.1 sec

400%

90%

5

Alarm Enable or Disable Disable

20 to 1000 % IFLC

IEC CurveType

Inverse, Very Inverse,Extremely Inverse Inverse

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Phase Loss is usually due to internal causes like improper connections in the circuit, blowing of one of the fuses, failure in switch gear contacts and external causes like line breakages, etc,.

Due to loss of a single phase, the other two normal (healthy) phases have to draw more current than the rated one to compensate the power. This increases the stator current, consequently increasing the heat generated in the windings. This leads to insulation failure which can cause further damage to the motor.

The Relay detects Phase Loss condition and gives:

� Pickup when one of phase current falls below 10 % of rated current (IFLC) and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after the Trip delay.

Table 6�10 lists the Phase Loss Protection settings available in the Relay.

Table 6-10: Phase loss Protection Settings


Trip Delay

Mode

Reset Modes

0.1 to 30 sec

Enable or Disable


StepIncrease

FactorySettings

0.1 sec

-

-

1 sec

Disable

Local

Note: When phase currents for all the 3-phases falls simultaneously below 10% of set full load current, the Relay will not detect this condition as Phase loss.

Voltage Based Protection

Over voltage Protection (59)

Over voltage is a condition where voltage in the power circuit rises above its preset value. Over voltage occurs usually due to internal causes like switching surges, insulation failure, arcing ground and Phase Loss.

The Relay detects the Over voltage condition and gives:

� An Alarm when voltage of any of the 3-phases reaches above the Alarm set value.

� Pickup when voltage of any of the 3-phases reaches above the pickup value and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after the Trip delay.

Phase Loss Protection (47A)

Phase Loss Protection is also known as single phase protection. Phase Loss is a condition in the 3-phase power circuit where one phase of the supply is not available to the motor terminals.


PROTECTIONS

Table 6-11: Overvoltage Protection Settings


Pickup Set

Pickup Reset

Alarm Set

Alarm Reset

Trip Delay

Alarm

Trip

Reset Modes

101 to 130 % of VN


95% of pickup


0.2 to 25 sec

Enable or Disable

Enable or Disable


StepIncrease

FactorySettings

5%

-

-

-

0.1 sec

-

-

-

120%

95%

10 sec

Disable

Disable

Local

Table 6�11 lists the Over voltage Protection settings available in the Relay.

Under voltage Protection (27)

Under voltage is a condition where the voltage in the power circuit decreases below 90 percent of its normal voltage. Usually Under voltage occurs during the heavy electrical demand (during peak hours).

Under voltage fault heats up the motor, it leads to winding insulation failure, this fails the motor permanently.

The Relay detects the Under-voltage condition and gives:

� An Alarm when any of the 3-phase voltages reaches below the Alarm set value.

� Pickup when any of the 3-phases voltage reaches below the pickup value and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after the Trip delay.

Table 6�12 Under-voltage Protection settings available in Relay.

Table 6-12: Under voltage Protection Settings


Pickup Set

Pickup Reset

Alarm Set

Alarm Reset

Trip Delay

Alarm

Trip

Reset Modes

20 to 85 % of VN


110 % of pickup


0.2 to 25 sec

Enable or Disable

Enable or Disable

Local, Remote,Communication, Auto

StepIncrease

FactorySettings

1%

-

-

-

0.1 sec

-

-

-

50%

110%

5 sec

Enable

Enable

Local

Note: Under voltage protection is disabled for the starting time set in the Relay. Under voltage protection will be inactive for voltage less than 10% of nominal voltage. Trip and Alarm Responses for Under Voltage can be separately con�gured through MCOMP suite or Display.

Voltage unbalance Protection (47)

Voltage unbalance is a condition where the voltage in the 3-phases power circuit differs in magnitude or phase, or both. Voltage unbalance would not affect the motor greatly. Voltage unbalance condition occurs because of variation in the loads, unbalanced incoming supply, due to Earth Faults etc,.

Voltage unbalance leads to unbalanced current. The effects of unbalanced current are explained under Current unbalance Protection.

The Relay detects Voltage unbalance condition and gives:

� An alarm when unbalance of 3-phase voltages goes above the Alarm set value.

� Pickup when unbalance of 3-phase voltage goes above the pickup value and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after the Trip delay.

Unbalance in 3-phases voltage is calculated using formula:

[ (Vmax � Vmin) /Vavg ] * 100 > Unbalance Set Value

Where,

Vmax: Maximum voltage of the 3-phases

Vmin: Minimum voltage of the 3-phases

Vavg: Average Voltage of the 3-phases

Table 6�13 lists the Voltage Unbalance Protection setting available in the Relay.


Pickup Set

Pickup Reset

Alarm Set

Alarm Reset

Trip Delay

Alarm

Trip

Reset Modes

5 to 50 % of VN


90% of pickup


0.2 to 20 sec

Enable or Disable

Enable or Disable


StepIncrease

FactorySettings

5%

-

-

-

0.1 sec

-

-

-

50%

90%

5 sec

Enable

Enable

Local

Table 6-13: Voltage Unbalance Protection Settings


PROTECTIONS

Phase reversal Protection (47B)

In 3-phase motors, the direction of motor is generally �xed according to the application. Motor will run in reverse direction due to phase reversal. This condition is undesirable and leads to severe damage to the process.

Reversal of phases is mainly caused due to power interruptions in the circuit. When motor receives power after frequent power interruption, there are chances of reversal of phases. It may also occur when motors are disconnected for maintenance.

The Relay detects Phase reversal condition of 3-phase voltages (if voltage connect is enabled) or current (if voltage connect is disabled) and gives:

� Pickup and trips instantaneously when the phase sequence of the motor supply is different from the proper set sequence.

Table 6�14 lists the Phase reversal Protection settings available in the Relay.

Frequency Based Protection

Under frequency Protection (81L)

The Relay detects Under-frequency condition and gives:

� An Alarm when the frequency reaches below the Alarm set value.

� Pickup when the frequency reaches below the pickup value and if the pickup condition persists it trips after the Trip delay.

Table 6�15 lists Under-frequency Protection settings available in the Relay.


Phase Sequence

Mode

Reset Modes

RYB or RBY

Enable or Disable


StepIncrease

FactorySettings

-

-

-

RYB

Enable

Local

Table 6-14: Phase Reversal Protection Settings


Pickup Set

Pickup Reset

Alarm Set

Alarm Reset

Trip Delay

Alarm

Trip

Reset Modes

94 to 98 % of FS


101% of pickup


1 - 30 sec

Enable or Disable

Enable or Disable


StepIncrease

FactorySettings

1%

-

-

-

1 sec

-

-

-

94%

101%

5 sec

Enable

Enable

Local

Table 6-15: Under Frequency Protection Settings

Note: This protection will be inactive if frequency is less than 10% of rated frequency.Trip and Alarm Responses for Over Frequency can be separately con�gured through MCOMP suite or Display.

Over frequency Protection (81H)

The Relay detects Over-frequency condition and gives:

� An Alarm when the frequency reaches above the Alarm set value.

� Pickup when the frequency reaches above the pickup value and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after the Trip delay.

Table 6�16 lists Over frequency Protection settings available in the Relay.

Advanced Features

Re-acceleration (27LV)

Re-acceleration is a method where the Relay restarts the motor automatically without user intervention for momentary voltage dips.

There are two cases in Re-acceleration:

1. Motor Re-acceleration function:

Voltage restores within 200 ms from the last voltage dip or no-voltage condition: If there is a sudden voltage dip in the power source for a duration of less than 200 ms then the motor should continue to run without any interruption. The output contact of the Relay holds the contacts for 200 ms. The motor will continue to run when voltage restores within 200 ms from the last voltage dip or no-voltage condition.


Pickup Set

Pickup Reset

Alarm Set

Alarm Reset

Trip Delay

Alarm

Trip

Reset Modes

101 to 105 % of FS


99% of pickup


1 - 30 sec

Enable or Disable

Enable or Disable


StepIncrease

FactorySettings

1%

-

-

-

1 sec

-

-

-

10%

99%

5 sec

Enable

Enable

Local

Table 6-16: Over Frequency Protection Settings

Note: This protection will be inactive if frequency is less than 10% of rated frequency.Trip and Alarm Responses for Under Frequency can be separately con�gured through MCOMP suite or Display.


PROTECTIONS

Note: Motor must be in running condition before voltage dip/no-voltage condition occurs.Presence of any maintained stop command at the time of restart command from the Relay will inhibit starting of the motor.


Voltage Dip

Voltage Restoration

Restart Time

Restart Delay

Aux and Motor Supply

Mode

20 to 90 % of VN

60 to 95 % of VN

0.2 to 60 sec

4 to 1200 sec

Same and Separate

Enable or Disable

StepIncrease

FactorySettings

5%

5%

0.1 sec

1 sec

-

-

65%

90%

5 sec

10 sec

Separate

Enable

Table 6-17: Re-acceleration Protection Settings

2. Motor Re-start function:

Voltage restores after 200 ms from last voltage dip or no-voltage condition: If the voltage dip persists for more than 200 ms, then the motor will stop. In this case, if voltage is restored within the restart time, then voltage will be validated for restart delay time. If the restored voltage persists for the set restart delay, then the motor will restart. However, if the motor is tripped due to UV fault during voltage dip condition, then after healthy restoration of voltage, the trip will be reset and the motor will be started. Table 6�17 lists the Re-acceleration Protection settings available in the Relay.

Motor Running(Voltage Stable)

New VoltageDip for< 200 ms(V<200)

In New V<200within 1 secondof previous(V<200)

No No drop off forMCOMP DOcontact. Motorcontinue to run

Yes Internal Timer starts(upto 1 second)

Voltage Dipfor >200ms(V>200)

�RESTARTTIME� timerstarts

Voltage resumesbefore �RESTARTTIME� timer expires

�RESTARTDELAY� timerstarts

Yes

No

Is Voltage Dip before�RESTART DELAY� andRESTART Time expires?

�RESTART DELAY� timerreloads and timer startsagain

RESTART DELAY timer expiresand start command given byMCOMP

Motor Running(Voltage Stable)

Figure 6�4 shows the Re-acceleration �ow chart with detailed working procedure of the Relay

Figure 6-4: Re-acceleration �ow chart


PROTECTIONS

Temperature Monitoring

Increase in temperature of the motor is caused mainly due to over current, locked rotor, single phasing etc,. Increase in temperature beyond the limit can cause insulation failure resulting in permanent breakdown of motor.

Temperature Protection is provided in the Relay through RTD or Thermistor (PTC) input. These sensors are placed on the windings of the motor where the temperature needs to be measured. A single RTD measures the temperature in terms of degree Celsius. In case of PTC, relay measures the temperature in terms of Ohmic value. Table 6�18 lists the temperature protection settings available in the Relay.

The Relay detects high temperature condition and gives:

� an Alarm when the temperature reaches above the Alarm Set value.

� Pickup when the temperature reaches above the pickup value and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after the Trip delay.

RTD type which can be connected to the relay is PT-100. The relay can measure the resistance from 100 to 175 ohm in case of RTD connection which is equivalently shown in MCOMP display for metering from 0 to 180oC. Any resistance greater than 175 ohm seen by the relay will be shown as 0 ohm in temperature metering. In case of Thermistor input, any PTC can be connected to the relay. Maximum of 6 PTC can be connected in series and given as an input to the relay.

In case of PTC, if measured resistance goes above 10K�, relay will issue a

trip command and trip cause will be PTC OPEN CIRCUIT. The alarm/pickup

value will be reset if the PTC resistance goes below set value of Reset

Resistance. If PTC resistance goes above set value of RESPONSE

RESISTANCE then the relay will issue a trip command and trip cause will be

PTC RESPONSE RESISTANCE. The alarm/pickup value will be reset if the

PTC resistance goes below set value of Reset Resistance. If PTC resistance

goes below Short circuit Trip Resistance (20�) then the relay will issue a

trip command and trip cause will be PTC SHORT CIRCUIT. The

alarm/pickup value will be reset if the PTC resistance goes above Short

circuit Reset Resistance (40�). Table 6-19 shows the PTC Input

Speci�cations supported by the relay.

Table 6-18: Temperature Monitoring Settings


Sensor Type

Pickup Set (RTD)

Pickup Reset (RTD)

Alarm Set (RTD)

Alarm Reset (RTD)

Trip Delay (RTD)

Response Resistance (PTC)

Reset Resistance (PTC)

Trip Delay (PTC)

Alarm

Trip

Reset Modes

RTD or PTC

25 � 180 ºC

Pickup Reset � 5ºC

5 � 250 sec

2700 � 4000 �

1600 � 2300 �

0.1 � 60 sec

StepIncrease

FactorySettings

1

1 sec

50 �

50 �

0.1 sec

RTD

100

95

90

85

100 sec

3600

1600

0.1 sec

Local

Pickup Set � 5ºC

Alarm Set � 5ºC

Enable or Disable

Enable or Disable


Figure 6-5: PTC protection working Philosophy

Time

2040

10000

PTCResistance

ResponseResistance

ResetResistance

Open Circuit Trip

ResponseResistanceTrip

Open CircuitAlarm/PickupClear

ResponseAlarm/PickupClear

Short Circuit Trip

Short Circuit Trip

Parameter

Response Resistance

Reset Resistance

Short Circuit Trip Resistance

Short Circuit Reset Resistance

PTC Open circuit resistance

Maximum voltage at PTC terminals

(R ptc = 4 K)

Maximum voltage at PTC terminals

(R ptc = open)

Maximum number of sensors

Maximum cold resistance of PTC sensor chain

Value

2700 � 4000 �

1600 � 2300 �

< 20 �

> 40 �

> 10000 �

Less than 7.5 V

30 V

6

1500

Table 6-19: PTC Thermistor Input Speci�cations

Note: Trip and Alarm response for Temperature protection can be separately con�gured through MCOMP suite or Display.


PROTECTIONS

Maximum Number of Starts Protection (66)

Maximum number of starts protection prevents the damage to the motor on effect of frequent starts. This protection allows the motor to start only for a pre-speci�ed number within a given period. If the number of starts exceeds the set value, then this protection keeps the Relay in inhibit mode, which prevents any further motor start. Table 6�20 lists the Maximum Number of Starts Protection settings available in the Relay.

Fail to Stop Protection

In some cases motor fails to stop even when it receives stop command, in this condition Fail to Stop Protection is needed. This may occur because of improper connections and settings. This protection monitors the current after STOP output is set. If the 3-phase current is still present for two seconds after STOP output is set, then a Trip will be issued on Fail to Stop Protection.

Interlock 1 to 12

The Relay is provided with 12 interlocks and any digital input can be con�gured as an interlock. Each interlock input can be assigned a function such as Alarm, Trip, Stop, Reset, etc,.which will be executed on the absence of that interlock (low signal on that con�gured interlock). Interlock con�gured as Trip causes the Relay to trip in the event of absence of the corresponding Interlock.

Communication Failure Monitoring

Communication failure monitoring provides the alarm and tripping action on failure of communication between the Relay and the master device. The master can be either DCS or PLC or SCADA. When "Trip only in Remote" setting is enabled, Relay gives trip command only when motor is running in remote mode. In case of motor running in local mode, Relay gives Alarm signal only.

The Relay detects communication failure condition and gives:

� An Alarm when Relay does not receives any query from the master device for the set time delay.

� Trip if communication failure condition persists for the trip delay after generation of an Alarm.

Table 6�21 lists Communication failure monitoring settings available in the Relay.

Excessive Start Time Protection

Excessive Start Time Protection is necessary when the motor takes more time to start than the preset time. The motor draws high current at the starting time (5-6 times of Full Load Current). If the motor continues to draw higher current even after the starting time, it causes insulation failure and burning of the windings.

The protection works on the basis of start time of the motor. It monitors the current during the starting time and if it does not follow the proper sequence then it will trip once starting time is over.

Table 6�22 lists the Excessive Start Time Protection settings available in the Relay.

Analog Input Monitoring

The two analog inputs available in expansion module supports 2 wire transmitter interface. The inputs supported are 4-20mA input or 0-20mA input. The metered value can be used trigger the alarm/trip when it crosses the set threshold value. The transmitter converts the real world signal, such as �ow, speed, position, level, temperature, humidity, pressure, etc., into the control signal necessary to regulate the �ow of current in the current loop.


Reference Period

Permissive Starts

Inhibit Period

Mode

Reset Modes

15 - 60 min

1 � 30 starts

1 � 120 min

Enable or Disable


StepIncrease

FactorySettings

1 min

1

1

-

-

60 min

20 starts

20 min

Enable

Local

Table 6-20: Maximum number of starts Protection Settings


Time Delay

Trip Delay

Alarm

Trip

Reset Modes

2 - 10 sec

1 - 30 sec

Enable or Disable

Enable or Disable


StepIncrease

FactorySettings

1 sec

1 sec

-

-

-

5 sec

5 sec

Disable

Disable

Local

Table 6-21: Communication Failure Monitoring Settings


Mode

Reset Modes

Enable or Disable


StepIncrease

FactorySettings

-

-

Enable

Local

Table 6-22: Excessive Start Protection Settings

Note: This protection is always enabled and cannot be disabled.

Note: Interlock functionality can be separately con�gured through the Display or MCOMP suite.


PROTECTIONS

Table 6�23 lists the Analog Input Protection settings available in the Relay.


Analog input type

Pickup Set

Pickup Reset

Alarm Set

Alarm Reset

Trip Delay

Alarm

Trip

Reset Modes

4-20mA or 0-20mA

0 � 20 mA

0 � 20 mA

0 � 20 mA

0 � 20 mA

1 to 30 sec

Enable or Disable

Enable or Disable


StepIncrease

FactorySettings

-

0.1 mA

0.1 mA

0.1 mA

0.1 mA

1 sec

-

-

-

4-20mA

4 mA

3.8 mA

3.6 mA

3.5 mA

1 sec

Disable

Disable

Local

Table 6-23: Analog Input Monitoring Settings

MCOMP AI terminals

24 VDC supply Transmitter/Sensor

-ve +ve +ve -ve

-ve +ve

Typical connection diagram for connecting the analog inputs in MCOMP expansion module is shown below. It is recommended to use twisted pair cable for analog input connection.


COMMUNICATION


COMMUNICATION

Overview

The Relay has two ports for communication. The �rst port is the local con�guration port used to communicate with the Display and MCOMP Suite. This communication is on L&T proprietary protocol. The second port is to communicate with the higher level system such as EWS/DCS/SCADA. This communication is on modbus or pro�bus protocol.

Communication interface is the physical connection on a device. Once the physical connection is established, the Relay communicates with the master on a protocol.

This section provides a detailed description of Communication Interface, Communication Protocols and Communication Architecture of different protocols used in the Relay.

Communication Interface

The Relay communicates with higher level system using protocols. Table 7�1 enlists the different communication protocols available in the Relay. The selection of protocol depends on the application.

Communication Protocol

Modbus RTU

Modbus is a serial protocol which supports communication between a single master device and multiple slave devices. In a Modbus network, the protocol governs how each IED shall know its device address, recognize a message addressed to it, determine the kind of action to be taken, and extract any data or other information contained in the message. If a reply is required, the IED will construct the reply message and send it using Modbus protocol. Table 7�2 shows the Relay Modbus RTU port connections.

In the Relay, Modbus communication allows a Modbus Master device to:

� acquire metering, monitoring and event data from the Relay

� control the Relay output contacts

� acquire the Relay �le system data for diagnostic

Table 7-1: Communication Interface

Communication Interface Setting range

RS485

RS485

RJ45

RS485

RS485

Modbus RTU

Profibus (DPV0, DPV1)

Modbus TCP/IP

L&T Proprietary

L&T Proprietary

4 pin connector

DB-9 pin connector

RJ45 female connector

RJ11 connector

Mini USB connector

Setting range

Communication card

Communication card

Communication card

Controller card

Display front

Setting range

Table 7-2: Modbus RTU port connection

NA

NA

NA

D+

D-

NA

NA

NA

NA

Relay RS485signal

Relay PinConnectionrequiredStandard Pin Standard RS485

signalDescription

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

GND

CTS+

RTS+

RxD+

RxD-

CTS-

RTS-

TxD+

TxD-

Common Ground

Clear to Send +

Ready to Send +

Received Data +

Received Data -

Clear to Send -

Ready to Send -

Transmitted Data +

Transmitted Data -

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

No

NA

NA

NA

41,42

43,44

NA

NA

NA

NA

Note: The communication interface port in the Relay will depend on the selection of protocol at the time of ordering of the Relay.


COMMUNICATION

Supported Modbus Function Codes

Table 7�3 lists of function codes supported by the Relay on Modbus:

Modbus RTU Settings

Modbus requires communication parameters such as baud rate, parity, node address etc, are to be set for establishing successful communication with the master. Table 7�4 shows Modbus RTU communication protocol settings.

The communication parameter settings available in the Relay are shown below:

Mode: It de�nes the mode of communication (ASCII or RTU). The Relay supports only RTU mode.

Node Address: It de�nes the node address of the Relay.

Baud Rate: It de�nes the speed at which the Relay communicates with Modbus Master.

Parity: Parity can either be set as even, odd or none.

Stop Bits: Number of Stop Bits used can be set as one or two.

Modbus memory map

Modbus RTU memory map enlists all the metering parameters, trip & event record parameters, DI/DO status and coil status. Function codes for different registers are also mentioned in the memory map. The Modbus RTU memory map shows the addresses for slow scan parameters (or parameters pre-de�ned at certain addresses). Refer Annexure A for Modbus RTU memory map.

Pro�bus DP

Pro�bus is an open, vendor-independent, �eld bus protocol. The Relay supports Pro�bus DP-V0 for cyclic data exchange and DP-V1 protocol for acyclic date exchange (read only) between master and slave devices.

PROFIBUS DP is a network that consists of two types of devices connected to the bus: master devices and slave devices. It is a bi-directional network, meaning that one device, a master, sends a request to a slave, and the slave responds to that request. Table 7�5 shows Pro�bus port connections in the Relay.

Code Description

01

02

03

04

05

08

Read Coil Status (0X references, coils)

Read Input Status (1X references)

Read Holding Registers (4X references)

Read Input Registers (3X references)

Force Single Coil (0X references)

Diagnostics

Table 7-3: Modbus Function Codes


Mode

Node Address

Baud Rate

Parity

Stop Bits

RTU

Even, Odd, None

One, Two

Step Increase FactorySettings

1

9600

RTU

1

9600

None

Two

1 - 247

9600 - 19200

Table 7-4: Modbus RTU Setting

Table 7-5: Pro�bus port connection

NA

NA

NA

D+

D-

NA

NA

NA

NA

Relay RS485signalRelay Pin

ConnectionrequiredStandard Pin

Standard RS485signal Description

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

GND

CTS+

RTS+

RxD+

RxD-

CTS-

RTS-

TxD+

TxD-

Common Ground

Clear to Send +

Ready to Send +

Received Data +

Received Data -

Clear to Send -

Ready to Send -

Transmitted Data +

Transmitted Data -

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

No

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


COMMUNICATION

Pro�bus Settings

Pro�bus requires communication parameters to be set for establishing successful communication with the master. Table 7�6 shows Pro�bus communication protocol settings available in the Relay.

The communication parameter settings available in the Relay are shown below:

Node Address: To de�ne the node address of the Relay.

Baud Rate: Baud rate is governed by the Pro�bus master

Pro�bus memory map

Refer Annexure A for Pro�bus memory map and GSD module details.

Modbus TCP/IP

Modbus TCP/IP shares the same application layer as the Modbus

RTU, however with a different physical layer (Ethernet). TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) and IP (Internet Protocol) govern the data traf�c control on the Ethernet media.

In other words, Modbus TCP/IP uses a Modbus RTU message transmitted with a TCP/IP envelope and sent over a network instead of serial lines. The Server does not have a Slave ID since it uses an IP Address instead. Table 7�7 shows Modbus TCP/IP port connections in the Relay.

The Relay communicates on Modbus TCP/IP using RJ45 port. It is recommended to use Category 5 (Cat 5) or Category 6 (Cat 6) without earth connection cable while connecting to MCOMP main unit.

Modbus TCP/IP Settings

Modbus TCP/IP requires certain communication parameters to be set for establishing successful communication with the master. Table 7�8 shows Modbus TCP/IP communication protocol settings available in the Relay.

The Relay supports Time synchronization using SNTP (Simple Network Time protocol). To use this feature, the SNTP server address and the proper time zone must be entered in the Relay settings as shown in Table 7�8. The time zone is set as per user location. In India, the time zone used is GMT+5h 30m.


Node Address

Step Increase FactorySettings

1 1101 - 126

Table 7-6: Pro�bus Setting

Table 7-7: Modbus TCP/IP port connection

Tx+

Tx-

Rx+

NA

NA

Rx-

NA

NA

Standard Pin Standard RS485 signal Description

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Tx+

Tx-

Rx+

NC

NC

Rx-

NC

NC

Transmit Data +

Transmit Data -

Receive Data +

Received Data +

Received Data -

Receive Data -

Ready to Send -

Transmitted Data +

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

No

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Relay RS485 signalRelay PinConnection required

Table 7-8: Modbus TCP/IP Setting

Parameter

Mode (DHCP)

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Default Gateway

SNTP Server Address

Time Zone

Factory Setting

Disabled

192.168.121.127

255.255.254.0

None

Two

0

Step Increase

1

1

1

1

Setting Range

0.0.0.0 � 255.255.255.255

0.0.0.0 � 255.255.255.255

0.0.0.0 � 255.255.255.255

0.0.0.0 � 255.255.255.255

Enabled/Disabled

+ 0 to 13 hours and 0 to 59 min


COMMUNICATION

Modbus TCP/IP Memory Map

Refer Annexure A for Modbus TCP/IP memory map and parameter mapping.

Parameter Mapping

Parameter mapping setting allows de�ne/con�gure the parameters to be sent on communication networks (Modbus serial, pro�bus, modbus TCP/IP) in sequential manner/consecutive address as per requirement. The addresses for these mapped parameters are �xed in case of Modbus serial and Modbus TCP/IP.

16 words, 32 words and 142 bytes can be con�gured in parameter mapping for Modbus serial, Modbus TCP/IP and Pro�bus communication protocol respectively. 16 and 32 words which can be de�ned by MCOMP suite HMI for Modbus serial & Modbus TCP/IP can be polled using function code 4 at the addresses 0001 to 0016 and 0001 to 0032 respectively. This con�guration of parameters can be done through MCOMP suite HMI.

Table 7-9 shows the list of available inputs for con�guring in parameter mapping.

Table 7-9 (1): List of inputs available in parameter mapping

Description

R Phase RMS Current

Y Phase RMS Current

B Phase RMS Current

Earth RMS Current

Average RMS Current

R Phase RMS Voltage

Y Phase RMS Voltage

B Phase RMS Voltage

Average RMS Voltage

Frequency

Power Factor

Phase Sequence

Total Active Power

Total Reactive Power

Total Apparent Power

Total Active Energy

Total Reactive Energy

Number of Start

Starting Time


Hours Run

Total Hours Run

Trip Counter

Trip Cause

Digital Input Status

Digital Output Status

Truth Table Outputs

Availability in case of

Modbus Serial Modbus TCP/IP Profibus

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√


COMMUNICATION


Description

Signal Conditioners Outputs

Counter Outputs

Timer Outputs

Motor Status

Expansion Module Types

Expansion Module 1 status



R-Y Line Voltage

Y-B Line Voltage

B-R Line Voltage

Total Apparent Energy

Temperature

Thermal Capacity

Number Of Stop Operations

% Current Unbalance

Trip cause Ext

Motor Stop cause

Motor Inhibit cause

Status Word

DI-DO/ Timer/ Counter- Signal Conditioner

Logic Status

Remaining Logic status

Watchdog Register Status

Internal DIO status

External DIO status 1 & 2

Trip Record � Trip Cause

Trip Record � Date

Trip Record � Time

Trip Record � IR

Trip Record � IY

Trip Record � IB

Trip Record � IEF

Trip Record � VR

Trip Record � VY

Trip Record � VB

Availability in case of


√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

x

x

x

√

x

x

x

x

x

x

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

x

x

x

√

x

x

x

x

x

x

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x


COMMUNICATION


Trip Record � Frequency

Trip Record � Temperature/Resistance

Trip Record � Power factor

Trip Record � Trip Cause 1

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

x

x

x

x

Status Word

The status word available in parameter mapping in case of Pro�bus protocol can be con�gured as per requirement. Each bitin the status word is open for user con�guration. Table 7-10 shows brief list of available inputs for con�guring in status word.

Table 7-10: Brief list of inputs available for status word

Sr No. Parameter Category Name

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Base unit DI-DO

COMPlogic outputs (Truth tables, timer, counter,signal conditioner)

Expansion units DI-DO

Protection/Monitoring function bits (Alarm, Pickup, Trip)

Internal bits (run, star, delta, forward, reverse, main,high speed, low speed, Drive available, Motor status,motor direction, permissive outputs, communicationcommands, indicator outputs etc)

Watchdog register status (Individual bits)

Stop cause (Individual causes)

Inhibit cause (Individual causes)

Expansion unit failure status

Communication Architecture

Modbus Architecture

Figure 7�1 shows typical architecture for Modbus RTU and Modbus TCP/IP. The Relays on Modbus RTU are shown to be connected in a daisy-chain con�guration in which a master is connected to multiple slave devices in a chain sequence.

In case of Modbus TCP/IP, the Relays are shown to be connected in a Star topology using Ethernet switches.

Pro�bus Architecture

Figure 7�2 shows typical architecture for Pro�bus. The Relays on pro�bus are shown to be connected with the master in a daisy-chain con�guration.

DescriptionAvailability in case of



COMMUNICATION

Figure 7-1: Typical Modbus Architecture

Modbus TCP/IP Modbus RTU

Modbus TCP/IPModbus TCP/IP

Loop No-01 Loop No-01Switchboard Area

Ethernet Switch Modbus RTU Modbus RTU Ethernet Switch

Modbus TCP/IP

DataConcentrator

Panel Area

EthernetSwitch

GPS Server for TimeSycronization

To DCS onModbus TCP/IP

EWS STATIONTo DCS on

Modbus TCP/IP(Redunbant)

Serial CableRS 232

TMDAP server

Laptop forParameterization

Figure 7-2: Typical Pro�bus Architecture

Laptop forParameterization

Serial CableRelay: RS 232

Pro�bus - DPNetwork

To DCS

Pro�bus - DPMaster


Switchboard Area

To DCS

Pro�bus - DPMaster


Switchboard Area

SETTINGS



SETTINGS

Overview

This section primarily consists of description of different setting parameters available in the Relay and basic instructions to feed those settings into the Relay in a very user friendly method. With the help of these instructions, the user can view/edit the Relay settings to suit the application. Instructions are further supported with the help of �ow charts/graphics and step-by-step procedures. The Relay settings are saved in non-volatile memory.

The user can view/edit following settings as per the requirement:

� System Settings

� Protection Settings

� Communication Settings

� Digital IO Settings

� Parameter Map Settings

� COMPlogic Settings

Relay Setting Modes:

� Display

� MCOMP Suite

� Communication

Setting Parameters

System Setting Parameters

System setting determines the essential con�guration parameters pertaining to the general motor characteristics, method of starting the motor, different modes of starting of motor, etc.

Different settings available under this are as follows:

Full load Current (IFLC): It is the maximum RMS current/rated current a motor is designed to draw in normal running condition.

Motor Rated Voltage (VL-L): It is the Average RMS line to line Voltage at which the motor operates at peak ef�ciency. It is possible to directly terminate 480 VL-L voltages on the Relay. External PT is required for connecting voltages higher than 480 VL-L to the relay.

Auxiliary Supply (VAUX): It allows the selection of Power Supply connected to MCOMP Base Unit. It is necessary to set correct value of aux supply for calculation during power down mode.

Voltage Connect: If enabled, it provides voltage, power, energy metering and allows detection of all voltage based protections. Frequency is detected on the basis of R phase voltage only. When disabled, voltage, power and energy measurement are not available apart from voltage based protections.

Trip Class: A numeric rating that correlates to the amount of time it takes to trip the motor when an overload condition occurs according to IEC60255 curve. Refer table 6-1 for details.

Starting Time: It is the maximum time allowed by the relay to the

motor to come to running state from starting state.

The following Protection functions (both Alarm and Trip) are disabled during this starting time:

� Overload

� Locked rotor

� Under Current

� Under Voltage

� Over current

Frequency: It is the nominal frequency supplied as detected from R phase voltage input when �Voltage connect� setting is enabled. System frequency can be selected either 50 Hz or 60 Hz.

Running current: It is the normal running current of the motor as % value of full load current. Under current protection setting is dependent on this setting.

Input Voltage Selection: It allows selection of system voltage connection type as 3P-3W or 3P-4W. This setting is provided in System setting window of MCOMP suite or Display and can be selected as three phase-three wire (3P-3W) or three phase-four wire (3P-4W). Upon selection, the Nominal voltage of the system gets set in the relay accordingly.

In case of 3P-3W, V = V and N L-L

in case of 3P-4W, V = V / �3,N L-L

where V = Line to line voltage or Motor Rated Voltage selected L-L

in system setting of the relay.

All the voltage based protection is dependent on V and hence N

proper selection of input voltage is necessary for the required function.

Auto start and Stop detection: This setting is available for detecting the start and stop condition of the motor when relay is used only for protection purpose without having any control on starting and stopping of the motor.

� Auto Start Detection: In an application where the relay is used only for metering and protection purpose and not for control operation, it is required to sense the starting of the motor through this auto start detection method. If enabled, the Relay senses that the motor has started when the average current sensed rises from 10 % IFLC to 100 % IFLC within 100 ms.

� Current Auto Stop: During running condition of motor and if enabled, the Relay senses that the motor has stopped on current auto stop cause when all the 3-phase currents falls below 10 % of set full load current (IFLC).The cause of the motor stop can be seen through special commands in MCOMP suite or display.

� Voltage Auto Stop: During running condition of motor and if enabled, the Relay senses that the motor has stopped on voltage auto stop cause when all the 3-phase voltage falls below 10 % of nominal voltage (VN).The cause of the motor stop can be seen through special commands in MCOMP suite or display.

It is possible to start the motor through start command via digital


SETTINGS

input or communication even if auto start detection is enabled.

Starter Settings: This setting determines the type of starter used to start the motor and their corresponding settings. Different types of starters can be con�gured as follows:

� DOL: Direct on line - This option is selected when motor is started by DOL starter only in one direction using digital input sources - START1 or START2. It can be started through communication as well if required.

� RDOL: Reversible Direct Online Starter - This option is selected when the motor is started by RDOL starter either in forward or reverse direction using digital input sources � START1, START2, START3 and START4. It can be started through communication as well if required. START1 & START3 is used to run the motor in Forward Direction and START2 & START4 for Reverse Direction.

� STAR DELTA: This option is selected when the motor is started by Star - Delta starter using digital input sources Start 1 and

START2. It can be started through communication as well if required.

When Star Delta is selected, two more settings to be set as given below:

Time in Star: It is the time in seconds for which the Star output is activated.

Change over Delay: It is the time interval between switching from Star to Delta output.

� TWO SPEED: This option is selected when the motor is started by two speed starter using digital input sources Start 1 and START2. It can be started through communication as well if required.

In case of Two-speed starter, the IFLC and External CT ratio setting is neglected and separate set of IFLC and external CT ratio is provided. High IFLC and Low IFLC settings and corresponding external CT ratio settings gets activated as required.

Table 8-2: Starter Settings


0.6 � 80 A (up to 600 A incase of external CT)

380 � 800 V

5 - 40

1 � 200

20 � 100 % IFLC

0.1 A up to 20A1A afterwards

1 V

5

1

1%

1A

415 V

230

Enable

10

10

50 Hz

100 %

3Phase-4Wire

Disable

Disable

Disable

Full Load Current

Motor Rated Voltage

Auxiliary Supply

Voltage Connect

Trip Class

Starting Time

Frequency

Running Current

Input Voltage

Auto Start Detection

Current Auto Stop

Voltage Auto Stop

24, 110, 230

Enable/Disable

50 and 60Hz

3Phase-3Wire or 3Phase-4Wire

Enable/Disable

Enable/Disable

Enable/Disable

Table 8-1: System Settings


0.1 � 200 sec 0.1 sec

Star Delta

Star Delta

Two Speed

Two Speed

Type

Time in star

Change over delay

High IFLC, Low IFLC

External CT ratio

Modes of Starting

DOL, RDOL, STAR DELTA, TWO SPEED

1 to (starting time -1) sec

0.6 � 80 A (up to 600 A with external CT)

For High IFLC, for low IFLC

All

All

All

All

Local

Remote

Communication

Local1, Local2, Local3, Remote


Start 1 & 3

Start 2 & 4




SETTINGS

Modes of Starting matrix: Different starting modes can be con�gured using con�guration matrix as shown in Table 8-3.

� START3 and START4 are used in RDOL, TWO SPEED starter.

� START1 and START3 are for forward, High Speed starts whereas START2 and START4 are for reverse, low speed start.

Selection of starting modes (L1, L2, L3 or R) depends on the status of mode selection bits available in communication (Output Command Byte 0 - bit 0.6 and bit 0.7) or status of digital inputs (con�gured as Local/Remote_1 and Local/Remote_2). At any given time, mode selection is possible either through communication or through digital inputs to the relay. Corresponding setting �Mode selection through communication� is provided in the relay which decides whether mode selection is through communication bits or through digital inputs statuses. Refer below table for mode selection.

Mode selection through communication: This setting is used to decide the mode selection place i.e. whether the control for mode selection is with communication bits or it is with digital inputs (Local/Remote switch on the panel).

When mode selection through communication is enabled then bits of Output Byte 0 i.e. 0.6 and 0.7 will be considered for deciding the mode. The combination will lead to four modes as mentioned above.

When this setting is enabled, then mode selection can only be possible through communication commands and any con�gured DI (Local/Remote_1 and Local/Remote_2 inputs) for mode selection will be ignored. The mode selection will act as per status of bit 0.6 and bit 0.7.

When this setting is disabled, there will be no action on the mode selection even if the communication bits 0.6 and 0.7 changes its state. Mode selection then solely depends on the con�gured DI (Local/Remote_1 and Local/Remote_2 inputs) and will act according to con�gured DI status.

Modes of starting Local 3 (L3) Remote (R)

Local (Display/MCOMP suite)

Remote (Digital Inputs)

START 1 (and START 2)

START 3 (and START 4)

Communication

Enable/Disable

Enable/

Disable

Enable/

Disable

Enable/

Disable

Enable/

Disable

Enable/

Disable

Enable/

Disable

Enable/

Disable

Enable/

Disable

Enable/

Disable

Local 2 (L2)

Enable/

Disable

Enable/

Disable

Enable/

Disable

Enable/

Disable

Enable/

Disable

Local 1 (L1)

Enable/

Disable

Enable/

Disable

Enable/

Disable

Enable/

Disable

Enable/

Disable

Table 8-3: Modes of starting matrix

Local/Remote_1 ORComm bit 0.6

0

0

1

1

Functional Description

0

1

0

1

Local/Remote_2 ORComm bit 0.7

L1

L2

L3

R

Mode

When in local1 mode, the relay accepts the start commands as per

the configuration in that particular column.





When in Remote mode, the relay accepts the start commands as per


Table 8-3a: Mode selection

Parameter

Mode selectionthrough communication

Table 8-3: Mode selection through communication setting

Setting Range

Enable/Disable

Factory Setting

Disable


SETTINGS

Note: If there is no setting of local / Remote DIs & mode selection through communication then the Local 1 mode will be followed by default.When mode selection from communication is enabled & Communication gets failed, then mode switches to Local 1 mode.If only Local/Remote_1 is con�gured in one of the digital inputs and Local/Remote_2 is not con�gured then only L1 and R mode will be active.�Four mode operation(L1,L2,L3,R)� and �mode selection through communication setting� is applicable only when Relay communicates on Pro�bus protocol and does not hold good for Modbus and Modbus TCP/IP protocols. In case of Modbus and Modbus TCP/IP relays, normal two mode operation (local and remote) is supported.

External CT Ratio: For motor ratings having FLC higher than 80A (approx. 45KW), the relay requires external conventional protection class CT�s for sensing the three phase currents along with its own current module. The external CT ratio mode needs to be enabled for higher motor ratings and different parameters of the external CT needs to be specify in the setting �eld as shown in the Table 8-4 :

PT Ratio: For connecting voltages higher than 480 VL-L, the external PT ratio mode needs to be enabled and different parameters of the external PT needs to be specify in the setting �eld as shown in the below Table 8-5 :

Event Records: This setting determines whether the Pick Up, Alarm and Trip event need to record by the relay or not.

Table 8-4: External CT ratio setting

2 � 1000 A

1 or 5 A

1 A

NA

Enable/Disable

Parameter Setting Range Factory Setting

Primary Current

Secondary Current

Mode

Table 8-5: External PT ratio setting

1 � 800 V

110 - 230 V

1 V

1 V

Parameter Setting Range Factory Setting

Primary Voltage

Secondary Voltage

Mode Enable/Disable

Display Password: This setting allows changing the value of the display password and available through MCOMP suite only.

Mode Change: If enabled, when any of the con�gured input changes its state during motor running condition, the relay generates the trip command. The modes of reset can be con�gured for this trip function.

Phase Selection: This setting allows selection of the number of voltage inputs connected to the relay i.e. two phase (R and Y) or three phase (R, Y and B). In case of two phase input, the third phase voltage is calculated from connected two phase voltages. Refer chapter application notes for more details.

Latched Trip function: This setting allows selection of the trip output functionality in case of relay�s aux. supply failure. If enabled, the already energized trip output will remain active after power recycle of the relay.

Feeder Type: This setting allows selection of the feeder type as motor or heater feeder. Heater feeder selection is for non-motor load application i.e. MCCB/Heater feeder application. Refer chapter application notes for more details.

Motor Tag: In this �eld the actual process tag for the motor/feeder can be set.

Start command through communication: This setting allows selection of start command as momentary or maintained.

In case of momentary, the start bits (bits of Output Command byte 0 i.e. 0.0, 0.2) from communication will have below functionality.

Bit is 1 = issues start command depending upon the starter type if all other conditions are healthy

Bit is 0 = withdraw start command and does not stop the motor

In case of maintained, the start bit (bits of Output Command byte 0 i.e. 0.0, 0.2) from communication will have below functionality.

1 = issues start command depending upon the starter type if all other conditions are healthy

0 = withdraw start command and stops the motor.

Table 8-7: Display Password setting

1111 - 9999

Parameter Setting Range

Password

Base unit DI/DO input, Expansion unit DI/DO inputs

Base unit DI/DO input, Expansion unit DI/DO inputs

Enable/Disable



Input 1

Input 2

Mode change

Reset Modes

Table 8-8: Mode Change setting

Table 8-6: Event Record setting

Enable/Disable

Enable/Disable

Enable/Disable


Pick Up

Trip

Alarm


SETTINGS

Protection Setting Parameters

Pl refer chapter 6 : Protection for details of protection setting parameters.

Digital Input Output Setting Parameters

This section provides a brief description about Digital Inputs/Outputs for performing con�gured operations. In addition, this section also provides information about DIO Expansion Module used to increase the number of DIOs.

Basic Digital Input/Output

The Relay is provided with six Digital Inputs and four Digital Outputs. DIOs are freely con�gurable by the user as per the scheme. DIOs are hard-wired connections which enable the user to remotely operate and control the motor. These DIOs have following characteristics:

Digital Input Features

� Digital Inputs accept 80-240 V AC/DC or 230 V AC/DC or 110V AC/DC or 24 VDC voltage input for sensing depending upon the ordering of the Relay.

� Validation period is a user con�gurable debounce period provided with each digital input in order to validate the authenticity of the signal.

Digital Output Features

� All four Digital Outputs are potential free, change-over contacts.

� Digital outputs can be con�gured as either pulse mode (unlatch) or level mode (latch). In case of pulse mode, the pulse width (hold time) is user con�gurable.

� Digital Outputs can be used to drive the main power contactor without using any auxiliary contactors.

DIO Expansion Module

DIO Expansion Module is used to increase the number of DIOs in the Relay. DIO Expansion Modules are available in two types:

� 4DI/2DO module

� 8DI module

� 5DI/2AI module

� 3DI/2AI/2DO module

User can connect maximum three expansion modules to the base unit. Table 8�10 gives the all the possible combinations of DIO expansion modules that can be used in addition with the base unit.

Two Phase, three phase

Enable/Disable

Motor/Heater

Alpha numeric characters can be entered

Momentary/Maintained


Phase Selection

Trip latch

Feeder Type

Motor/Feeder Tag

Start command throughcommunication

Table 8-9: System setting 2

Single unit Combination Expansion unit 1

1

2

3

4

Table 8-10 (1): Expansion Module Combination matrix


4DI/2DO

8DI

5DI/2AI

3DI/2DO/2AI

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Two unit Combination Expansion unit 1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7


4DI/2DO

4DI/2DO

4DI/2DO

4DI/2DO

8DI

8DI

8DI

8DI

4DI/2DO

5DI/2AI

3DI/2DO/2AI

8DI

5DI/2AI

3DI/2DO/2AI

X

X

X

X

X

X

X


SETTINGS

Table 8-10 (2): Expansion Module Combination matrix

Three unit Combination Expansion unit 1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7


4DI/2DO

4DI/2DO

8DI

8DI

8DI

8DI

8DI

4DI/2DO

8DI

8DI

8DI

8DI

4DI/2DO

4DI/2DO

8DI

8DI

8DI

5DI/2AI

3DI/2DO/2AI

5DI/2AI

3DI/2DO/2AI

Digital Input Settings

The following settings are used to con�gure any Digital Input:

Type: This decides the functionality of input. Each input type is unique i.e. user cannot assign one Type to two Digital input. Incase input is not used, Type is selected as NONE.

User can select any of the digital input types as explained below:

� START1:

a. In case of DOL starter, if START1 input is applied, then con�gured RUN digital output is activated (provided drive status is healthy i.e. ready to start).

b. In case of RDOL Starter, if START1 input is applied, then con�gured FORWARD relay digital output is activated (provided drive status is healthy i.e. ready to start).

c. In case of Star/Delta Starter, if START1 input is applied, then con�gured Star/Delta digital output sequence will start (provided drive status is healthy i.e. ready to start).

d. In case of Two Speed Starter, if START1 input is applied, then con�gured High Speed digital output is activated (provided drive status is healthy i.e. ready to start).

� START2:

a. In case of DOL Starter, if L/R input is high and START2 input is applied, con�gured RUN digital output is activated (provided drive status is healthy i.e. ready to start). If L/R input is absent, RUN output will not be activated if START2 is applied.

b. In case of RDOL Starter, if input is present then con�gured REVERSE Relay digital output is activated (provided drive status is healthy i.e. ready to start).

c. In case of Star/Delta Starter, if L/R input is high and START2 input is applied, con�gured Star/Delta digital output sequence will start (provided drive status is healthy i.e. ready to start). If L/R input is absent, Star/Delta output sequence will not be activated if START2 is applied.

d. In case of Two Speed Starter, if input is applied, then con�gured Low Speed digital output is activated (provided drive status is healthy i.e. ready to start).

� START3 & START4:

These types of input are applicable only in case of RDOL starter.

a. If L/R input is high and START3 input is applied, then con�gured FORWARD RELAY digital output is activated indicating drive running in forward direction in remote mode. If L/R input is absent, FORWARD output will not be activated if START3 is applied.

b. If L/R input is high and START4 input is applied, con�gured REVERSE RELAY digital output is activated indicating drive running in forward direction in remote mode. If L/R input is absent, REVERSE output will not be activated if START4 is applied.

� STOP:

Stop is a reverse logic. For any type of starter, STOP input should always be present in order to start the drive. If input is removed, then the drive stops immediately and goes to inhibit condition until STOP input is released i.e. goes high. If the input is not high, relay inhibits the drive start.

� LOCAL/REMOTE:

L/R input is for deciding local and remote mode operation of the drive. If the input is low, the relay takes it as local mode and drive can be started through START1 input in case of DOL & Star/Delta starter or START1 & START2 input in case of RDOL starter. Drive cannot be started through START2 input in case of DOL & Star/Delta Starter or START3 & START4 input in case of RDOL starter.

If the input is high, relay takes it as remote mode and drive can be started through START2 input in case of DOL & Star/Delta starter or START3 & START4 input in case of RDOL starter. Drive cannot be started through START1 input in case of DOL & Star/Delta Starter or START1 & START2 input in case of RDOL starter.


SETTINGS

� INTERLOCK 1 to 12:

Interlock indicates healthiness of the system. If any one of interlock becomes low, then relay acts as per the interlock con�guration done.

� ESTOP:

Emergency Stop is a Reverse Logic. If input is removed or becomes low, the relay will STOP the motor. If this input is low, drive is allowed to start if valid start command is present. Only on next high to low transition, relay will stop the drive through ESTOP.

� CONTACTOR FEEDBACK 1 and 2:

After drive starting, if contactor feedback is not available within set �contactor time�, relay will stop the drive. During running condition, if contactor feedback becomes low, then drive will be stopped immediately.

Contactor feedback 1 is for main contactor in case of DOL starter or FORWARD contactor in case of RDOL starter. Contactor feedback2 is for REVERSE contactor in case of RDOL starter.

� RESET:

This input is for resetting the trip condition of the motor when �modes of reset� in any protection is selected as �remote�. If motor is in trip condition and �reset� input becomes high, it will reset the trip. Under normal condition, if this input becomes high, it will be simply ignored. For taking trip resetting action Input should undergo Low to High Transition.

� TEST:

This input when high indicates relay is in test position. In test condition, all the inhibit conditions gets ignored and start/stop operation can be performed to check control wiring in the module.

� NONE:

When selected for an input, no action for that particular input.

Mode: This setting is available only for Digital inputs: START1, START2, START3 and START4. Mode de�nes whether a particular input is to be continuously monitored or momentarily.

Validation Period: Validation period is user con�gurable de-bounce period provided with each Digital Input in order to validate the authenticity of the signal.

Interlock Con�guration: This setting is visible only when corresponding Digital Input is con�gured as Interlock 1 to 12. The Interlock can be con�gured as:

Disable: No action will be taken on interlock.

Alarm: If the interlock is absent then the Alarm output will be activated.

Trip: If the interlock input is absent then a Trip output will be activated after the set trip delay.

Interlock 1 to 12: If the interlock input is absent, Indicator 1 output will be activated (if Indicator 1 is con�gured as Digital Output for Interlock).

Local Reset: If interlock input is not present, then it inhibits Local Reset.

Communication Reset: If interlock input is not present, then it inhibits Communication Reset.

Auto Reset: If interlock input is not present, then it inhibits Auto Reset.

Remote Reset: If interlock input is not present, then it inhibits Remote Reset.

Stop: If interlock input is not present then, it inhibits motor from starting. Also motor will be stopped if running.

Interlock is considered for Test: If Enabled, interlocks are taken into consideration when the Relay is put in TEST Mode.

Interlock Trip Delay: It is available if any of interlock is con�gured in TRIP Mode.

Reset Modes: It is available if any of interlock is con�gured in TRIP Mode. Reset modes are con�gurable.

Table 8-11: Digital Input Settings

Start1 to Start4, Stop, Reset, Local/Remote, Estop, Contactor Feedback1,

Contactor Feedback2, Test, Interlock 1 to 12, None

Momentary or Maintained

0.1 - 60 sec

Enabled or Disabled

Enabled or Disabled

0.1 � 10 sec



Type

Mode

Validation Period

Interlock configuration

Interlock is considered for test

Interlock Trip delay

Reset Modes

Parameter

0.1 sec

0.1 sec

Local


SETTINGS

sec) if following conditions are satis�ed:

a. Drive is in stop condition

b. No trip condition

c. Thermal capacity is below threshold value.

� PERMISSIVE_OUTPUT (1 to 3):

This output is activated when corresponding PERMISSIVE_ OUTPUT command is received on communication from PLC/SCADA/DCS.

� TRUTH TABLE OUTPUT (1 to 16):

This is logic status generated by truth tables which can be directly assigned to energize the digital output contact.

� SIGNAL CONDITIONER OUTPUT (1 & 2):

This is logic status generated by Signal conditioner which can be directly assigned to energize the output contact.

� TIMER OUTPUT (1 & 2):

This is logic status generated by Timer which can be directly assigned to energize the output contact.

� COUNTER OUTPUT (1 & 2):

This is logic status generated by Counter which can be directly assigned to energize the output contact.

� NONE:

When selected for an output, no action for that particular output.

Mode: There are two modes available for output,

Level: The corresponding output is activated till next command to drop the output.

Pulse: The corresponding output is activated for the hold time, which is user con�gurable.

Hold Time: This setting is visible only in pulse mode. It is the time for which the corresponding Digital Output is activated when the output is triggered.

Follow Delay: This setting is visible only in FOLLOW type. It is the time to activate the corresponding Digital Output after the source parameter is activated.

Heater Delay: This setting is visible only in HEATER type. It is the time to activate the HEATER output after ful�lling the below conditions:

a. Drive should be in stop position and healthy.

b. No trip condition.

c. Thermal capacity is below threshold value.

The Heater Output is used in winding heating application. Table 8�12 shows the Digital output settings.

Digital Output Settings

The following settings are used to con�gure any Digital Output:

Table 8�11 shows the Digital Input settings.

Type: This decides the functionality of output. Incase output is not used, Type is selected as NONE.

User can select any of the digital output types as explained below:

� ALARM:

Whenever there is an alarm/pickup condition, then Alarm output is activated.

� TRIP:

If there is any trip condition (due to protection or interlock), then Trip output will be activated and all start outputs (RUN or FORWARD RELAY or REVERSE RELAY or STAR or DELTA or MAIN or HIGH SPEED or LOW SPEED) will be dropped.

� FOLLOW:

When selected, it follows the status of con�gured parameter after follow delay.

� RUN:

If starter type is DOL and if there is a valid start command (either through MCOMP suite/Display or communication or DI), then RUN output will be activated (provided drive status is healthy).

� FORWARD AND REVERSE RELAY:

If starter type is RDOL and if there is a valid start command i.e. forward or reverse (either through MCOMP suite/Display or communication or DI) then FORWARD or REVERSE RELAY output will be activated respectively (provided drive status is healthy).

� MAIN, STAR and DELTA:

If Starter type is STAR/DELTA and if there is a valid start command (either through MCOMP suite/Display or communication or DI), then Star-Delta sequence follows as below.

a. First �Main� and "Star" output will be activated.

b. After 'Time in Star' delay Star output will be dropped, then after 'Changeover delay' �Delta� output will be activated.

� HIGH SPEED & LOW SPEED:

If Starter type is Two Speed and if there is a valid start command i.e. high speed start or low speed start (either through MCOMP suite/Display or communication or DI), then High Speed sequence or Low Speed sequence starts respectively.

� INDICATORS (1 to 12):

Indicator output will be activated when the corresponding DI interlock con�gured as INTERLOCK is low.

� DRIVE AVAILABLE:

This output is activated when relay is not in inhibit condition and drive is in stop condition. During running condition, this output goes low stating drive is not available.

� HEATER:

This output is activated after set heater delay (range is 1 to 3600


SETTINGS

Analog Output Settings

One 4 - 20 mA analog output is provided in the Relay which can be con�gured to any of the parameter given in Table 8�13.

If the value of selected parameter is less than or equal to minimum set value, Analog output gives 4 mA & if the parameter value is equal to or greater than maximum set value, it gives 20 mA.

Alarm, Indicator 1 to 12, Follow 1 to 2, Run, Main , Start, Delta, Forward Relay,

Reverse Relay, Trip, Drive Available, Heater, High Speed, Low Speed,

Permissive_Output_1 to 3, Truth Table outputs, Signal Conditioner Outputs, Timer &

Counter outputs, None

Level or Pulse

0.1 � 1000 sec

0.1 � 1000 sec

1 � 3600 sec


Type

Mode

Hold Time

Follow Delay

Heater Delay

Table 8-12: Digital Output Settings

Parameter

0.1 sec

0.1 sec

1 sec

A

A

A

A

V

V

V

V

V

Type Unit Step Size

0.1 (0-20), 1(21-3600)

0.1 (0-20), 1(21-3600)

0.1 (0-20), 1(21-3600)

0.1 (0-20), 1(21-3600)

1

1

1

1

1

R Phase Current

Y Phase Current

B Phase Current

Average Current

R Phase Voltage

Y Phase Voltage

B Phase Voltage

Average Voltage

R-Y Line Voltage

Min Max

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

3600

3600

3600

3600

375

375

375

375

375

V

V

kVA

kW

kVAR

oC

Hz

1

1

0.1

0.1

0.1

1

1

Y-B Line Voltage

B-R Line Voltage

Apparent Power

Active Power

Reactive Power

Temperature

Frequency

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

375

375

28.3

28.3

28.3

200

75

Table 8-13: Analog Output Settings


SETTINGS

� assign logical outputs as Digital outputs and also transmit them over communication soft link on Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP/IP, Pro�bus for HMI/DCS applications.

Figure 8�1 shows the general overview of COMPlogic:

COMPlogic Modules

COMPlogic comprises of 4 modules:

Truth Table

A truth table shows the output of a logical circuit for all combinations of inputs using logic gates. In COMPlogic user has an additional �exibility in customizing the logic according to the application.

There are 16 Truth Tables available in the Relay COMPlogic.

� 2 Input 1 output (Two tables)

� 3 Input 1 output (Four tables)

� 4 Input 1 Output (Ten Tables)

Signal Conditioner

There are two Signal Conditioners available in the Relay COMPlogic, each of which can be con�gured to one of the following four types:

1. Non inverting

2. Inverting

3. Positive Edge Latch

4. Negative Edge Latch

Output of signal conditioner is triggered by conditioning input either on,

� Level: by sensing level of input (high or low level).

� Edge: by sensing transition from low level to high level (+ve edge) or high level to low level (-ve edge).

If there is any error in factory set calibration of analog o/p then user can offset the error using Manual scale factor option (manual calibration). Analog Output can be manually calibrated using manual scale factor option; by setting 'Expected Output' and 'Actual Output' which is getting observed for selected parameter. Considering the linear behavior in current output, we can �nd out the expected analog output current for applied input value of a parameter. Table 8-14 gives Manual scale factor setting of Analog output.

Communication Setting Parameters

Refer chapter-7: Communication for details of communication setting parameters available in the relay.

COMPlogic Setting Parameters

COMPLogic is a part of the MCOMP suite parameterization software. COMPlogic provides �exibility to select any parameter as an input of the Boolean modules and perform gate operation to get desired output. The user can program the required logic using different modules such as truth tables, signal conditioners, timers, and counters. Different logic gates available in truth table are AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, and Custom mode. The user can de�ne its own logic gate using custom mode.

COMPlogic is an important feature used to build and execute logical schemes within the Relay. Using COMPlogic a user can:

� simplify existing physical complexities into simple logical blocks there by reducing additional hard writing

� create cascaded logical blocks where output of one logical block can be used as input of another logical block

4- 20 mA

1 � 24 mA


Expected Output

Actual Output

Table 8-14: Manual Scale factor settings

0.1

0.1

Step Increase

Figure 8-1: COMPlogic Overview

Output 1

Output 2

Output 3

DI 1DI 2

DI 3

Output Trip

RestartTimer

DI 4

Event/Trip

COMPlogic Module

Truth Table

Signal Conditioner

Timer

Counter

Table 8-14: Manual Scale factor settings

16

2

2

2

Number of Modules


SETTINGS

Figure 8-2: Signal Conditioners

NON-INVERTING

Input

Reset

Output

Input Down: A positive edge transition on this input decrements the count.

Count limit is between 0 - 65535, roll over is not permitted.

Reset: This input resets the counter output to low level and count to zero.

Limit: It is a maximum count limit at which counter output is triggered. The limit range is from 1 to 65535.

The counter output will be set high once the count is equal to limit. It stays latched until the reset is high. For example set counter limit to 4, Figure 8�3 illustrates the working of a Counter with the help of waveforms.

There are two Timers available in Relay COMPlogic which can be selected from any one of the following four types.

1. Level triggered ON Timer

2. Rising edge ON Timer

3. Falling edge OFF Timer

4. Rising edge OFF Timer

Figure 8�4 shows a basic block diagram of a Timer.

NEGATIVE EDGE LATCH

Input

Reset

Output

POSITIVE EDGE LATCH

Input

Reset

Output

INVERTING

Input

Reset

Output

Figure 8-4: Block Diagram of Timer

Input Output

Reset

Timer

Limit

Counters

There are two Counters available in Relay COMPlogic. The counter output is generated based on the following inputs:

Input Up: A positive edge transition on this input increments the count. Count limit is between 0 - 65535, roll over is not permitted.

Level triggered ON Timer

Figure 8�5 shows operation of Level triggered ON Timer.

Timer triggers on input high level. After timer countdown, output triggers provided input still remains at high level. If input drops before timer countdown, then the timer reloads as shown in section-1.

Section-2 shows that if reset is high during timer countdown then,

� Timer is reloaded.

Output

Reset

InputDown

Input Up

1 2 3 2 1 1 2 3 4

12 0

Figure 8-3: Counter


SETTINGS

� Output is reset to low level.

Rising edge ON Timer

Figure 8�6 shows operation of Rising edge ON Timer.

Timer triggers on rising edge of input. After timer countdown, output triggers and remains latched even after input drops to low level. Output drops when reset is at high level as shown in section-1.

Before the timer countdown, if another rising edge of the input is sensed the timer reloads and restarts the countdown as shown in section-2.

Section-3 shows that if reset is high during timer countdown then,

� Timer is reloaded.

� Output is reset to low level.

Falling edge OFF Timer

Figure 8�7 shows operation of Falling edge OFF Timer.

Timer triggers on falling edge of input. Output is triggered on

rising edge of input and remains latched even if input drops. After timer countdown, output is set to low level as shown in section-1.

Before the timer countdown, if another rising edge of the input is sensed the timer reloads as shown in section-2.

Section-3 shows if reset is high before the timer countdown then the timer drops & reloads and hence the output drops. If output is already high and reset is sensed before timer countdown then output remains high.

If reset is high before the application of the input, output remains at low level till reset drops as shown in section-4.

Rising edge OFF Timer

Figure 8�8 shows operation of Rising edge OFF Timer.

Timer and outputs are triggered on rising edge of input. After the timer countdown, output is set to low level. If input drops before countdown, then timer drops, reloads and hence output drops as shown in section-1.

Section-2 shows if reset is at high level before the timer countdown, then timer drops and reloads.

Section-3 shows if reset is present before the application of input, then output remains at low level.

Figure 8-7: Falling Edge OFF Timer

Input

Reset

Time

Output

Section-1 Section-4Section-3Section-2

Figure 8-5: Level Triggered ON Timer

Section-1 Section-2

Input

Reset

Time

Output

Figure 8-6: Rising Edge ON Timer

Section-1 Section-3Section-2

Input

Reset

Time

Output

Figure 8-8: Rising Edge OFF Timer

Section-1 Section-2 Section-3

Input

Reset

Time

Output


SETTINGS

List of logical Inputs

Source of Input

Communication

Start from Communication

Stop from Communication

Reset from Communication

Permissive_Output_1

Permissive_Output_2

Permissive_Output_3

FIXED 0

FIXED 1

DI 1 to DI 6

DI 1-1 to DI 1-8

DI 2-1 to DI 2-8

DI 3-1 to DI 3-8

DO 1 to DO 4

DO 1-1 & DO 1-2

DO 2-1 & DO 2-2

DO 3-1 & DO 3-2

TT 1 to TT 16

SIGNAL CONDITIONER1 O/P& SIGNAL CONDITIONER2 O/P

TIMER1 O/P & TIMER2 O/P

COUNTER1 O/P & COUNTER2 O/P

MOTOR DIRECTION

PICK UP STATUS

INHIBIT STATUS

ALARM STATUS

TRIP STATUS

MOTOR RUNNING STATUS

DRIVE AVAILABLE

Name of Input Description

Status bit will get Set on receiving START or STOP or RESET command overcommunication.

These statuses are general purpose Set/Reset commands given from masterdevice over communication.

Input fixed to 0

Input fixed to 1

Base unit digital input

Expansion unit 1 digital inputs



Base unit digital outputs

Expansion unit 1 digital outputs



Truth table outputs

Signal conditioner outputs

Timer outputs

Counter outputs

�0� for forward or Low speed & �1� for reverse or High speed

�0� on no pickup or pickup reset condition & �1� for active pickup

�0� for motor healthy conditions & �1� for Inhibit condition

�0� for no alarm or alarm reset condition & �1� for active alarm

�0� when no Trip or trip reset condition & �1� for active Trip

Fixed Levels

Digital Inputs

Digital Outputs

Logic ModuleOutputs

Motor Status Data

�0� for inhibit condition or running condition & �1� for ready to start i.e.no inhibit condition

�0� for motor not running in any of the starter mode & �1� for motorrunning in any of the starter mode

RUN

FWD RELAY

REV RELAY

MAIN

In RDOL starter; this status will be �1� for high forward running outputi.e. �FWD RELAY�

In DOL starter ; this status will be �1� for high �RUN� output

In Star Delta starter; this status will be �1� for high �MAIN� output

In RDOL starter; this status will be �1� for high reverse running outputi.e. �REV RELAY�

Motor Statusas per specificstarter Type

Table 8-15 (1): Logical Inputs


SETTINGS

Source of Input

Motor Statusas per specificstarter Type

STAR

DELTA

HIGH SPEED

LOW SPEED

Name of Input Description

In Star Delta starter; this status will be �1� for high �STAR� output

In Star Delta starter; this status will be �1� for high �DELTA� output

In TWO SPEED starter; this status will be �1� for high �HIGH SPEED� output

In TWO SPEED starter; this status will be �1� for high �LOW SPEED� output

Indicator status will become �1� if status of corresponding Interlock input,configured as Indicator is low i.e. "0�INDICATOR1 to INDICATOR12Interlocks

Individual protection & Interlock bits for showing TRIP status.

Individual protection & Interlock bits for showing ALARM status.

Individual protection & Interlock bits for showing PICKUP status.

PROTECTION TRIP

PROTECTION ALARM

PROTECTION PICKUP

Protection Bits

Relay Con�guration

Relay Con�guration through the Display

The Display is designed to be compatible with the Relay. The Display also serves as a medium between the Relay and MCOMP Suite using mini USB cable readily available as phone charging cable. Settings can be done by using the Display as described below and shown in the following �ow chart:

Procedure to con�gure the IFLC value using the Display:

1. Press ENT button to move from metering parameter view to menu window.

2. Use Left, Right navigation keys to go to settings menu.

3. Press ENT to inside settings menu.

4. Enter correct password using navigation keys to proceed further. Default password is 1111.

5. Press ENT to go into system settings.

6. Press ENT to go into IFLC setting.

7. Press ENT to edit the IFL value.

8. Change the value using Up, Down navigation keys.

9. Press ENT to con�rm the selected value.

10. Press Return to save the changed value with option as YES/NO.

11. Select YES and press ENT to con�rm the save.

12. Press Return for save message con�rmation. After successful saving, a pop up window will appear showing message as �SAVED�. At this stage, the �PWR/COMM� LED turns �On� in the following sequence: Green-Orange-Green.

13. Press Return key till Settings menu screen appears.

14. Use Up, Down keys to go to commands menu.

15. Press ENT to go inside the commands menu.

16. Enter correct password using navigation keys to proceed further.

17. Use Up, Down keys to go to the �MCOMP reset� option.

18. Press ENT to send the command for MCOMP reset. One can also do a power recycle of the MCOMP main unit instead of sending �MCOMP reset� command through display. This will put the new settings into effect.

Table 8-15 (2): Logical Inputs


SETTINGS

Figure 8-: Display operating procedure

Metering Settings:

:

:

:

Ir

Iy

Ib

Iavg

0.0A

0.0A

0.0A

0.0A

ENT < >

ENT

ENT

< >ENT

Settings

SystemProtectionDigital I/O

PASSWORD

X X X X

Settings

EditView

ENT

System

Full load CurrentMotor VoltageAuxiliary Supply

ENT ENTFull Load Current

I�c : 10.1A

Full Load Current

I�c : 10.1A

ENT

Full Load Current

I�c : 11.0A

Full Load Current

I�c : 11.0A

System

Full load CurrentMotor VoltageAuxiliary Supply

ENT

SAVE?

YESNO

Settings

EditView

Settings

SyPDigital I/O

SAVED

ENT < >

PASSWORD

X X X X

COMMANDS Settings

ENT< >

Commands

Motor Start 1Motor Start 2Motor Stop

Commands

Motor Start 2Motor StopMCOMP Reset

< > ENT

Commands

Motor Start 2Motor StopMCOMP Reset

CMD Sent


SETTINGS

Relay Con�guration through MCOMP suite

MCOMP Suite is a software developed for local parameterization and monitoring of the Relay. MCOMP Suite provides a user friendly environment for con�guration and parameterization of the Relay.

2. Press Read All to read all the settings before changing the settings.

Procedure to con�gure the I value using MCOMP Suite:FLC

1. Open MCOMP Suite window and switch to Con�guration mode.


SETTINGS

3. After successful read, press System Settings to get the following screen.

4. Press Motor Settings, change IFLC value by choosing a required value from drop down button, next to the IFLC value bar and press Write All.


SETTINGS

5. If user is in Admin Mode, online changes in settings are directly saved after writing the settings. If user is in Supervisor Mode user needs to reset MCOMP after using Write All option. Procedure to save the settings in Supervisor Mode is:

Relay Con�guration through Communication

The Relay consists of three communication protocols: Pro�bus, Modbus RTU and Modbus TCP/IP. Out of these three communication protocols, only Modbus TCP/IP can be used for remote parameterization over communication. Each parameter has its own holding register address (Function Code 03). Holding register address for each parameter is shown in Modbus TCP/IP Memory Map.

Procedure to con�gure the IFLC value through Communication:

1. Refer Modbus TCP/IP memory map for holding register address of the particular parameter.

2. Poll particular register (40151) of IFLC to see the current value of IFLC.

3. Write required value of IFLC by considering scaling factor.

4. Poll the IFLC register.

Examples of Relay Selection and Basic Settings using Motor data

Case 1:

In an appapplication, a Motor Protection Relay (MPR) is required for 30 kW motor with 5DI and 4DO. MPR shall work on 230 VAC supply, shall show all the metering values on the local panel and shall be communicable on Modbus TCP/IP. MPR shall accept

thermistor inputs for temperature sensing. MPR shall take CBCT inputs for sensitive earth fault detection of 2A. The motor details speci�ed by motor manufacturer are:

� Full load Current = 53 A, Voltage = 415 V, Frequency = 50 Hz

� Locked Rotor Current = 600 % FLC

� Starting time at 100% full load = 0.2 second

� Type of Starting = Direct On Line

Solution:

Selection of MCOMP Relay:

Referring to MCOMP Order Codes, following part numbers can be selected.

� Main unit: MCOMP_MAIN_UNIT_U_T_YI_P

� Current Module: MCOMP_CURRENT_MODULE_C5_1

� Display unit: MCOMP_DISPLAY_UNIT_D1_1

Above selected relay main unit have universal aux supply, Modbus TCP/IP communication, universal DI sensing voltage and thermistor (PTC) input port. Current module is type-5 which covers full load current of 53 A with 1meter CM cable. Display unit is selected of 240 aux supply with 1 meter display cable for local panel metering. Expansion module part number is not selected as DI/DO requirement is ful�lled by main unit itself.

Monitoring Window Special Commands Reset MCOMP Send


SETTINGS

To navigate to the motor Settings, follow the path shown below:

Settings(Con�guration Mode)

SystemSettings

MotorSettings

ReferFigure 8-1


SystemSettings

StarterSettings

ReferFigure 8-1


ProtectionSettings

LockedRotor

ReferFigure 8-1


ProtectionSettings

EarthFault

ReferFigure 8-1

Case 2:

In an application, a Motor Protection Relay (MPR) is required for 90kW motor with 9DI and 5DO. MPR shall work on 230VAC supply, shall show all the metering values on the local panel and shall be communicable on Pro�bus. MPR shall accept RTD input for temperature sensing. The motor details speci�ed by motor manufacturer are:

� Full load Current = 162A, Voltage = 415V, Frequency = 50 Hz

� Locked Rotor Current = 600 % FLC

� Max Starting time = 1 sec

� Type of Starting = Reverse Direct On Line

Solution:

Selection of MCOMP Relay:

As the required motor FLC is more than 81A, we need to use external conventional CTs along with MCOMP CM. The external CTs should be chosen such that FLC of the motor falls in 50% to 100% of external CT primary. Since FLC is 162 A, a 200 :1 or 200:5 CT may be chosen. Let us choose 200:1 CT. The MCOMP CM selection will depend on conventional CT secondary. For 1A and 5A secondary, the required CM should be CM1 and CM2 respectively. So CM1 is required. The expansion unit of 4DI/2DO along with relay main unit will serve the 9DI/5DO requirement.

Referring to MCOMP Order Codes, following part numbers can be selected.


SETTINGS

� Main unit: MCOMP_MAIN_UNIT_U_P_YI_R

� Current Module: MCOMP_CURRENT_MODULE_C1_1

� Display unit: MCOMP_DISPLAY_UNIT_D1_1

� Expansion Unit: MCOMP_EXPANSION_UNIT_A_YI_1

Basic settings to be done in the Relay as:


SystemSettings

MotorSettings

ReferFigure 8-2


SystemSettings

StarterSettings

ReferFigure 8-2


ProtectionSettings

LockedRotor

ReferFigure 8-2


ProtectionSettings

ExternalCT Ratio

ReferFigure 8-2


SETTINGS

Setting Sheet

System Settings

Motor Tag

Motor Tag (10 characters)

Motor Settings

Full Load Current (I )FLC

Motor Rated Voltage (V )L-L

Auxiliary Supply (V )AUX

Voltage Connect

Trip Class

Starting Time

Frequency

Running Current

Input Voltage

Auto Start detection

Current Auto Stop

Voltage Auto Stop

Starter Settings

Type

Time in Star (Visible if Type = STAR/DELTA)

Change Over Delay(Visible if Type = STAR/DELTA)

High Speed IFLC

(Visible if Type = TWO SPEED)

Low Speed IFLC

(Visible if Type = TWO SPEED)

Modes of Starting

Local_L

Local_R

Remote_Start1_L, Remote_Start2_R

Remote_Start1_L, Remote_Start2_R

Remote_Start1&2_L(Visible if Type = RDOL)

Remote_Start3&4_R(Visible if Type = RDOL)

0.6 � 600 A

380 � 800 V

24, 110, 230 V

Enable or Disable

Class 5 - 40

1 � 200 seconds

50 or 60 Hz

20 � 100 % IFLC

3 Phase - 3 Wire or

3 Phase � 4 Wire

Enable or Disable

Enable or Disable

Enable or Disable

DOL, RDOL, STAR/DELTA, TWO SPEED

1 to (starting time -1) seconds

0.1 � 200 seconds

0.6 � 600 A

0.6 � 600 A

Local and Remote

Enable or Disable

Enable or Disable

Enable or Disable

Enable or Disable

Enable or Disable

Enable or Disable

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

Enable or Disable =____________________Communication_L

Table 8-16 (1): System settings


SETTINGS

Enable or Disable

Enable or Disable

Enable or Disable

1111 - 9999

1 � 1000 A

1A or 5A

Enable or Disable

1 � 800 V

110 � 230 V

Enable or Disable

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable

Enable or Disable

Two Phase or Three Phase

Enable or Disable

Motor or Non Motor

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=________________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

Event Records

Pick Up

Trip

Alarm

Display password

Admin

External CT Ratio

Primary Current

Secondary Current

Mode

PT Ratio

Primary Voltage

Secondary Voltage

PT Ratio Enable

Mode Change

Input 1

Input 2

Mode

Phase SelectionPhase Selection

Latched TripLatched Trip

Feeder TypeFeeder Type

Enable or Disable =____________________Communication_R

Table 8-16 (2): System settings


SETTINGS

Protection Settings

Table 8-17 (1): Protection settings

20 � 100 % IFLC

100 % ITM

80 � 100 % ITM

Enabled

5 � 30 % ITM

30 � 95 % ITM

Enable or Disable

1 � 1200 seconds

Local, Remote, Auto, Communication

Enable or Disable

50 � 1000 % IFLC

90% of pickup

0.1 � 10 seconds


Enable or Disable

Enable or Disable

30 � 85 % IR

110 % of pickup

0.1 � 120 seconds


Enable or Disable

Enable or Disable

5 � 100 % IFLC

85 � 100 % of pickup

1 � 30 seconds


Enable or Disable

Enable or Disable

VECTOR_SUM or CBCT

20 � 500 % IFLC

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=________________________

=____________________

Current Set (I )SET

Pickup Set

Alarm Set

Thermal Memory


Thermal Inhibit Setting

Pause Setting

Pause Time Delay

Reset Modes

Alarm Mode

Over Current

Pickup Set

Alarm Set

Trip Delay

Rest Modes

Alarm Mode

Trip Mode

Under Current

Pickup Set

Alarm Set

Trip Delay

Rest Modes

Alarm Mode

Trip Mode

Current Unbalance

Pickup Set

Alarm Set

Trip Delay

Rest Modes

Alarm Mode

Trip Mode

Earth Fault

Earth Fault Type

Pickup Set (Ief)(Visible if Earth Fault Type = VECTOR_SUM)

Overload


SETTINGS

Pickup Set (Ief)(Visible if Earth Fault Type = CBCT)

Alarm Set(Visible if Earth Fault Type = VECTOR_SUM)

Alarm Set(Visible if Earth Fault Type = CBCT)

Trip Delay (Run)

Trip Delay (Start)(Visible if Earth Fault Type = CBCT)

Alarm Delay (Run)(Visible if Earth Fault Type = CBCT)

Alarm Delay (Start)(Visible if Earth Fault Type = CBCT)

Rest Modes

Alarm Mode

Trip Mode

Locked Rotor

Pickup Set

Alarm Set

Trip Delay

Reset Modes

Alarm Mode

Trip Mode

IDMT Overcurrent (Stage 1 and 2)

Pickup Set

Time Constant

Curve Type

Reset Modes

Alarm Mode

Trip Mode

Over Voltage

Pickup Set

Alarm Set

Trip Delay

Reset Modes

Alarm Mode

Trip Mode

Under Voltage

Pickup Set

0.1 � 20 A

90% of pickup

0.1 � Pickup set value A

0 � 60 seconds

0 � 25 seconds

0 � 60 seconds

0 � 60 seconds


Enable or Disable

Enable or Disable

150 � 1000 % IFLC

90% of Pickup

0.5 � 30 seconds


Enable or Disable

Enable or Disable

20 � 1000 % IFLC

0.5 � 600 seconds



Enable or Disable

Enable or Disable

101 � 130 % VN

95% of Pickup

0.2 � 25 seconds


Enable or Disable

Enable or Disable

20 � 85 % VN

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=________________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________



SETTINGS

110 % of Pickup

0.2 � 25 seconds

Local, Remote, Communication, Auto

Enable or Disable

Enable or Disable

5 � 50 % VN

90 % of Pickup

0.2 � 20 seconds


Enable or Disable

Enable or Disable

RYB or RBY


Enable or Disable

0.1 � 30 seconds


Enable or Disable

101 � 105 % FS

99 % of Pickup

1 � 30 seconds


Enable or Disable

Enable or Disable

94 � 98 % FS

101 % of Pickup

1 � 30 seconds


Enable or Disable

Enable or Disable

20 � 90 % VN

65 � 95 % VN

0.2 � 60 seconds

4 � 1200 seconds

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=________________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

Alarm Set

Trip Delay

Reset Modes

Alarm Mode

Trip Mode

Voltage Unbalance

Pickup Set

Alarm Set

Trip Delay

Reset Modes

Alarm Mode

Trip Mode

Phase Reversal

Phase Sequence

Reset modes

Mode

Phase Loss

Trip Delay

Rest Modes

Mode

Over Frequency

Pickup Set

Alarm Set

Trip Delay

Reset Modes

Alarm Mode

Trip Mode

Under Frequency

Pickup Set

Alarm Set

Trip Delay

Reset Modes

Alarm Mode

Trip Mode

Re-acceleration

Voltage Dip

Voltage Restoration

Restart Time

Restart Delay



SETTINGS

Same or separate

Enable or Disable

2 � 10 seconds

1 � 30 seconds

Local, Remote, Auto

Enable or Disable

Enable or Disable

Enable or Disable


Enable or Disable

15 � 60 minutes

1 � 30 starts

1 � 120 minutes


Enable or Disable

RTD (PT-100) or Thermistor(PTC)

o25 � 180 C

oPickup Set Value � 5 C

oPickup Reset Value � 5 C

oAlarm Set Value � 5 C

5 � 250 seconds

2700 � 4000 ohm

1600 � 2300 ohm

0.1 � 60 seconds


Enable or Disable

Enable or Disable

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=________________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

Aux and Motor Supply

Mode


Time Delay

Trip Delay

Reset Modes

Trip only in Remote

Alarm Mode

Trip Mode


Rest Modes

Mode

Maximum Number of Starts

Reference Period

Permissive Starts

Inhibit Period

Reset Modes

Mode

Temperature

Sensor Type

Pickup Set(Visible if Sensor Type = RTD(PT-100))

Pickup Reset(Visible if Sensor Type = RTD(PT-100))

Alarm Set(Visible if Sensor Type = RTD(PT-100))

Alarm Reset(Visible if Sensor Type = RTD(PT-100))

Trip Delay(Visible if Sensor Type = RTD(PT-100))

Response Resistance(Visible if Sensor Type = Thermistor(PTC))

Reset Resistance(Visible if Sensor Type = Thermistor(PTC))

Trip Delay(Visible if Sensor Type = Thermistor(PTC))

Reset Modes

Alarm Mode

Trip Mode



SETTINGS

Communication Settings

DIO Settings (Digital Input/Output)

Type

Mode(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or

Start3 or Start4)

Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,Contactor Feedback2, Test, LogicalInputs, None

Maintained or Momentary

=____________________

=____________________

IO Settings

Input 1

Modbus, Profibus, Modbus TCP/IP

RTU

1 � 247

9600 or 19200

None, Even, Odd

One, Two

1 � 126

Enable or Disable

0.0.0.0 � 255.255.255.255

0.0.0.0 � 255.255.255.255

0.0.0.0 � 255.255.255.255

0.0.0.0 � 255.255.255.255

+/-, 0 - 13 hours, 0 � 59 minutes

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

Protocol Selection

Modbus (Visible if Protocol Selection = Modbus)

Mode

Node Address

Baud Rate

Parity

Stop Bits

Profibus (Visible if Protocol Selection = Profibus)

Node Address

Modbus TCP/IP (Visible if Protocol Selection = Modbus TCP/IP)

DHCP Mode

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Default Gateway

SNTP Server Address

Time Zone (GMT)

3 � 15 %

3 � 15 %

1 � 15 %

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

Hysteresis Band

Current

Voltage

Frequency


Table 8-18: Communication settings

Table 8-19 (1): DIO settings


SETTINGS

Validation Period

(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1

or Contactor Feedback2)

Contactor Time(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or

Contactor Feedback2)

Interlock Config(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)

Interlock Trip Delay(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)

Reset Modes(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)

Interlock Considered for Test(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)

0.1 � 60 seconds

0.1 � 60 seconds

Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to

Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,

Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop

0.1 � 10 seconds


Enable or Disable

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

Type


Start3 or Start4)



=____________________

=____________________

Validation Period









0.1 � 60 seconds

0.1 � 60 seconds




0.1 � 10 seconds


Enable or Disable

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

Input 2



SETTINGS

Type


Start3 or Start4)



=____________________

=____________________

Validation Period









0.1 � 60 seconds

0.1 � 60 seconds




0.1 � 10 seconds


Enable or Disable

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

Type

Mode(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 orStart3 or Start4)



=____________________

=____________________

Validation Period(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1or Contactor Feedback2)

Contactor Time(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 orContactor Feedback2)


0.1 � 60 seconds

0.1 � 60 seconds

Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 toInterlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

Input 4

Input 3



SETTINGS




0.1 � 10 seconds


Enable or Disable

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

Type


Start3 or Start4)



=____________________

=____________________

Validation Period








0.1 � 60 seconds

0.1 � 60 seconds


0.1 � 10 seconds


Enable or Disable

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

Type




=____________________

=____________________


0.1 � 60 seconds =____________________

Input 5

Input 6



SETTINGS






0.1 � 60 seconds


0.1 � 10 seconds


Enable or Disable

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

Type

Mode(Hidden if Type = None)

Run, Forward Relay, Reverse Relay,Follow1, Follow2, Alarm, Trip, Main,Star, Delta, Indicator1 to 12, DriveAvailable, Heater, Truth Table o/p 1to Truth Table o/p 16, Timer 1 o/p,Timer 2 o/p, Counter 1 o/p, Counter 2o/p, Signal Conditioner 1 o/p, SignalConditioner 2 o/p, Permissive o/p 1 toPermissive o/p 3, High Speed, LowSpeed, None

=____________________

=____________________Level or Pulse

Hold Time(Visible if Mode = Pulse)

=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds

Follow Delay(Visible if Type = Follow 1 or Follow 2)

=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds

Heater Delay(Visible if Type = Heater)

=____________________1 � 3600 seconds

Type



=____________________

=____________________Level or Pulse

Output 1

Output 2



SETTINGS


=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds


=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds


=____________________1 � 3600 seconds

Type



=____________________

=____________________Level or Pulse


=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds


=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds


=____________________1 � 3600 seconds

Type



=____________________

=____________________Level or Pulse


=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds


=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds


=____________________1 � 3600 seconds

Output 3

Output 4



SETTINGS

Expansion IO Module 1

Module Type =____________________8DI or 4DI+2DO or None

Module ID =____________________8DI Module1 or 4DI+2DO Module1or None

Type


Start3 or Start4)



=____________________

=____________________

Validation Period







0.1 � 60 seconds

0.1 � 60 seconds


0.1 � 10 seconds


Enable or Disable

=____________________

=____________________


=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

Type




=____________________

=____________________

Validation Period(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1

or Contactor Feedback2)0.1 � 60 seconds =____________________

Input 1-1(Hidden if Module Type = None)




SETTINGS

0.1 � 60 seconds




0.1 � 10 seconds


Enable or Disable



0.1 � 60 seconds

0.1 � 60 seconds




0.1 � 10 seconds


Enable or Disable

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________







Type


Start3 or Start4)

Validation Period












SETTINGS

Type


Start3 or Start4)



=____________________

=____________________

Validation Period









0.1 � 60 seconds

0.1 � 60 seconds




0.1 � 10 seconds


Enable or Disable

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

Type


Start3 or Start4)



=____________________

=____________________



0.1 � 60 seconds

0.1 � 60 seconds

=____________________

=____________________


Input 1-5(Visible if Module Type = 8DI)



SETTINGS






0.1 � 10 seconds


Enable or Disable

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

Type


Start3 or Start4)



=____________________

=____________________

Validation Period





0.1 � 60 seconds

0.1 � 60 seconds

=____________________

=____________________








0.1 � 10 seconds


Enable or Disable

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

Type =____________________






SETTINGS


Start3 or Start4)

Maintained or Momentary =____________________

Validation Period





0.1 � 60 seconds

0.1 � 60 seconds

=____________________

=____________________








0.1 � 10 seconds


Enable or Disable

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

Type =____________________






0.1 � 60 seconds

0.1 � 60 seconds

=____________________

=____________________





0.1 � 10 seconds


=____________________

=____________________

=____________________




SETTINGS


Enable or Disable =____________________

Type



=____________________

=____________________Level or Pulse


=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds


=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds


=____________________1 � 3600 seconds

Type



=____________________

=____________________Level or Pulse


=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds


=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds


=____________________1 � 3600 seconds

Output 1-1

(Visible if Module Type = 4DI+2DO)

Output 1-2




SETTINGS

Type


Start3 or Start4)



=____________________

=____________________

Validation Period









0.1 � 60 seconds

0.1 � 60 seconds




0.1 � 10 seconds


Enable or Disable

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________







0.1 � 60 seconds


0.1 � 10 seconds


Enable or Disable

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________


Module Type

Module ID

8DI or 4DI+2DO or None

8DI Module1 or 4DI+2DO Module1or None

=____________________

=____________________



SETTINGS

Type


Start3 or Start4)



=____________________

=____________________

Validation Period









0.1 � 60 seconds

0.1 � 60 seconds




0.1 � 10 seconds


Enable or Disable

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

Type


Start3 or Start4)



=____________________

=____________________

Validation Period





0.1 � 60 seconds

0.1 � 60 seconds

=____________________

=____________________





SETTINGS






0.1 � 10 seconds


Enable or Disable

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

Type




=____________________

=____________________

Validation Period





0.1 � 60 seconds

0.1 � 60 seconds

=____________________

=____________________








0.1 � 10 seconds


Enable or Disable

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

Type =____________________






SETTINGS


Start3 or Start4)


Validation Period





0.1 � 60 seconds

0.1 � 60 seconds

=____________________

=____________________








0.1 � 10 seconds


Enable or Disable

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

Type =____________________






0.1 � 60 seconds

0.1 � 60 seconds

=____________________

=____________________





0.1 � 10 seconds


=____________________

=____________________

=____________________




SETTINGS



Type =____________________



Start3 or Start4)


Validation Period





0.1 � 60 seconds

0.1 � 60 seconds

=____________________

=____________________







0.1 � 10 seconds


=____________________

=____________________

=____________________



Type =____________________



Start3 or Start4)


Validation Period



0.1 � 60 seconds =____________________





SETTINGS


0.1 � 60 seconds =____________________





0.1 � 10 seconds


=____________________

=____________________

=____________________



Type



=____________________

=____________________Level or Pulse


=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds


=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds


=____________________1 � 3600 seconds

Type


=____________________

Output 2-2


Output 2-1




SETTINGS


Level or Pulse

0.1 � 1000 seconds

0.1 � 1000 seconds

1 � 3600 seconds



0.1 � 60 seconds

0.1 � 60 seconds




0.1 � 10 seconds


Enable or Disable

8DI or 4DI+2DO or None

8DI Module1 or 4DI+2DO Module1or None

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________





Type


Start3 or Start4)

Validation Period









Module Type

Module ID




SETTINGS

Type




=____________________

=____________________







0.1 � 60 seconds

0.1 � 60 seconds




0.1 � 10 seconds


Enable or Disable

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

Type


Start3 or Start4)



=____________________

=____________________

Validation Period





0.1 � 60 seconds

0.1 � 60 seconds

=____________________

=____________________





SETTINGS








0.1 � 10 seconds


Enable or Disable

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

Type




=____________________

=____________________








Interlock Considered for Test

0.1 � 60 seconds

0.1 � 60 seconds


0.1 � 10 seconds


Enable or Disable

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

Type =____________________

(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)






SETTINGS


Start3 or Start4)

=____________________









0.1 � 60 seconds

0.1 � 60 seconds




0.1 � 10 seconds


Enable or Disable

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

Type


Start3 or Start4)



=____________________

=____________________







0.1 � 60 seconds

0.1 � 60 seconds




0.1 � 10 seconds


=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________





SETTINGS



Type


Start3 or Start4)



=____________________

=____________________

Validation Period








0.1 � 60 seconds

0.1 � 60 seconds




0.1 � 10 seconds


=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________



Type


Start3 or Start4)



=____________________

=____________________

Validation Period



0.1 � 60 seconds =____________________





SETTINGS






0.1 � 60 seconds




0.1 � 10 seconds


=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________



Type



=____________________

=____________________Level or Pulse


=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds


=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds


=____________________1 � 3600 seconds

Type


=____________________

Output 3-2


Output 3-1




SETTINGS


=____________________Level or Pulse


=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds


=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds


=____________________1 � 3600 seconds

Parameter Mapping Settings

User configurable as per requirement

(Hidden if Protocol Selection = Profibus in communication settings)

16 words (in case of Modbus serial)32 words (in case of Modbus TCP/IP)

=____________________

COMPlogic Settings

Truth Tables

2I/1O Truth Table 1

Input 1

Input 2

Gate Operation

2I/1O Truth Table 2

Input 1

Input 2

Gate Operation

3I/1O Truth Table 3

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Gate Operation

3I/1O Truth Table 4

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Gate Operation

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable

AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, CUSTOM

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable


Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable


Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable


Parameter mapping


Table 8-20: Parameter mapping settings

Table 8-21 (1): COMPlogic settings


SETTINGS

3I/1O Truth Table 5

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Gate Operation

3I/1O Truth Table 6

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Gate Operation

3I/1O Truth Table 7

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

Gate Operation

3I/1O Truth Table 8

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

Gate Operation

3I/1O Truth Table 9

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

Gate Operation

3I/1O Truth Table 10

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

Gate Operation

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable


Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable


Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable


Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable


Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable


Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable




SETTINGS


Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

Gate Operation


Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

Gate Operation


Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

Gate Operation


Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

Gate Operation


Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

Gate Operation


Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

Gate Operation

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable


Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable


Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable


Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable


Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable


Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable




SETTINGS

Signal Conditioners

Signal Conditioner 1

Type

Input

Reset


Type

Input

Reset

Counters

Counter 1

Limit

Input Up

Input Down

Reset

Counter 2

Limit

Input Up

Input Down

Reset

Timers

Timer 1

Limit

Type

Input

Reset

Timer 2

Limit

Type

Input

Reset

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

=____________________

Inverting, Non Inverting, Positive EdgeLatch, Negative Edge Latch

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable

Inverting, Non Inverting, Positive EdgeLatch, Negative Edge Latch

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable

1 � 65535 count

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable

1 � 65535 count

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable

0 � 65535 seconds

Level Triggered ON timer, Rising Edge

ON timer, Falling Edge OFF timer,

Rising Edge OFF timer

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable

0 � 65535 seconds

Level Triggered ON timer, Rising Edge

ON timer, Falling Edge OFF timer,

Rising Edge OFF timer

Freely Programmable

Freely Programmable



USER INTERFACE


USER INTERAFCE

Overview

This section provides a detailed description of local interfacing methods available with the Relay. There are two local modes available for a user to interface with the Relay.

� MCOMP Suite Interface.

� Display Interface.

MCOMP Suite Interface

MCOMP Suite is software available with the Relay through which a user can monitor, control or con�gure the Relay, also serves as a strong diagnostic tool for troubleshooting purpose. A PC is required to host this software through which it can communicate with the Relay. The MCOMP Suite can be used only after the installation of .NET Framework 3.5 Service Pack 1 or higher.

With MCOMP Suite, it is possible to:

� monitor and meter the data: Various metering parameters such as 3-Phase Voltage, 3-Phase Current, Frequency, Phase Sequence and parameters related to Power and Energy can be monitored. The status of Digital inputs and outputs can also be monitored.

� program and modify the settings: The software allows a user to set the values as per requirement.

� read actual values: A user can get the actual motor running values.

� read motor status: A user can check the status of motor - run, stop or trip condition.

� read pre-trip & trip cause data and number of event records: A user can get the recent 5 trip records and causes for the trips.

The MCOMP Suite can run in MCOMP of�ine mode as well. In this case, settings may be saved for future use. If the Relay is connected to a computer and communications are enabled, the Relay can be programmed from the setting screens.

Software Pre-requisites:

� Operating System supported is Microsoft Windows XP, Vista and Windows 7.

� Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 or higher

� MCOMP Suite: (in �MCOMP Suite� folder).

Hardware Pre-requisites:

� Minimum memory space required on root drive of hard disk is 1GB.

� Pentium 4 computer with 2GHz speed and 512MB RAM.

� RS485 Converter.

Installation Guide

.NET Framework 3.5 Service Pack installation

After ensuring the minimum requirements indicated earlier, use the following procedure to install the .NET Framework 3.5 Service Pack 1 (If it is not installed, install the framework from the folder 'Framework3.5SP1').

1. Double click on FrmWrk3.5sp1, to get the setup �le Dotnetfx35sp1.exe.Double click on Dotnetfx35sp1.exe to install .NET Framework 3.5 Service Pack 1.

Screenshot - 1


USER INTERAFCE

2. Read and accept the terms of the license agreement and click on Install button.

3. After accepting the license agreement, Windows will start installing the setup. Status bar shows the progress.

4. When the installation is completed, Windows gives a message .NET Framework 3.5 Sp1 has been installed successfully.

Screenshot - 2

Screenshot - 3

Screenshot - 4


USER INTERAFCE

Multi-version MCOMP Suite Installation

MCOMP Suite installation can be carried out by using Multi-version MCOMP Suite.

1. Double click on the setup.exe of Multi-version MCOMP Suite.

2. Multi-version MCOMP Suite setup wizard guides the user through the steps required to install Multi-version MCOMP Suite on computer. Press Next button to continue.

3. Select the installation path by pressing Browse button. Press Next button to continue with the setup. (Multi-version MCOMP Suite can install for all users who uses this computer or for self depending on access).

Screenshot - 1

Screenshot - 2 Screenshot - 3


USER INTERAFCE

4. Con�rm installation: The installer is ready to install the Multi-version MCOMP Suite on your computer. Click on Next to start the installation.

5. After successful installation press Close button to �nish the setup.

MCOMP Suite Installation

Using Multi-version MCOMP Suite user can install MCOMP Suite.

1. Double click on Multi-version MCOMP Suite icon

2. Double click on the above icon to install MCOMP Suite from MCOMP Suite multiversion setup in two ways Manual Selection and Auto Selection:

In case of Manual Selection: Select the MCOMP Firmware Version and click on Install MCOMP Suite option.

In case of Auto Selection user can select the MCOMP version directly by reading MCOMP �rmware version from the Relay and Click on Install MCOMP Suite option.

Screenshot - 4 Screenshot - 5


USER INTERAFCE

3. Click on Next to start installation.

4. After the installation gets completed, an icon as shown below will be created as a shortcut on the desktop of the computer.

Operation Guide

MCOMP Suite Con�guration

Con�gure the MCOMP Suite to work with the Relay using following steps:

� Double click on the MCOMP Suite short cut icon, the next window will prompt for user ID and password. A three level of access is provided to a particular user depending on the read-write permission. Enter the user id and password.

Table 9 � 1: MCOMP Suite Access shows the available access to login MCOMP Suite.

Admin

Supervisor

User

Sr. No. Login Type

1

2

3

Table 9-1: MCOMP Suite Access

FunctionRead Write

√

√

√

√

√

√

Provided with additional privileges and system data access

No administrative privileges on system data access. User can only change/modify the Relay settings.

Read only mode. User can not change/modify the Relay settings.

Access


USER INTERAFCE

� After entering the user ID and password, the main (Monitoring) window will appear.

Monitoring Mode

Options

Click on the Options tab to con�gure the communication settings required for the MCOMP Suite. User can select the appropriate COM port, to which the Relay is connected. Other parameters such as Device ID, Baud Rate, Parity and Stop Bits will remain same.

� To connect the MCOMP Suite through the Display, select the check box Connect through Display. The user can also select a theme from the drop down box as per the requirement.


USER INTERAFCE

Change Password

Click on Change Password tab to change the existing password. In this case user has to enter old password and then set a new password. The MCOMP Suite will validate the old password and stores the new password.

Switch To Con�guration Mode

Click on Switch To Con�guration Mode tab to view the following window.


USER INTERAFCE

About

Click on About tab to view the version of the MCOMP Suite.

Zoom In

Click on Zoom In tab to zoom in.

Short cuts: [CTRL + +] or use [CTRL + Scroll Mouse Up].

Zoom Out

Click on Zoom Out tab to zoom out the size.

Short cuts: [CTRL + -] or use [CTRL + Scroll Mouse Down].

Zoom to Fit

Click on Zoom to Fit to zoom to normal size.

Short cuts: [CTRL + *] or use [CTRL + Scroll Mouse Button].

Con�g Report

Click on Con�g Report tab to generate a report. A printable report will be saved in an XML format as shown below:


USER INTERAFCE

The path for the generated report is as shown below:

New User

Click on New User tab to create a new login account.

User

Click on User tab to view list of users. This option allows Administrator/Supervisor to block or unblock a user.

Supervisor

Click on Supervisor tab to view list of supervisors. This option allow administrator to block or unblock a supervisor.

Start Monitoring

Click on Start Monitoring tab to monitor various measurable parameters. If the Relay is connected to PC and the communication is working without any error, then MCOMP Suite will display a system message: MCOMP Online!!!

C:\Program Files\M COMP Suite\M COMP Suit v4.4.1\SETTINGS_20102522_172420.xml


USER INTERAFCE

Record Viewer

Record Viewer is used to view the trip/event records and starting curve of the motor. The Relay can store last �ve trip and event records.

� The Trip indicator in the MCOMP Suite glows red when the Relay senses trip condition. Click on Trip tab to view trip records. The trip record window shows the details of the last �ve trips along with causes in FIFO (First In First Out) sequence:

- The window shows the trip cause, date and time of occurrence and pre-trip values.

- Click Refresh to retrieve the last stored trip records.

- Click Report to generate a report of trip records with date and time.

- It also maintains the trip counter that counts the number of trips occurred.

Trip Records

Note: On occurrence of an error, the MCOMP Suite will display an error message Error in reading the data from MCOMP. Retry again. Check the connection between MCOMP Suite and the Relay for resolving an error.


USER INTERAFCE

� The Alarm/Pick-up indicator in the MCOMP Suite glows red when the Relay senses alarm/pick-up condition. Click on Alarm/Pick-Up tab to view event records. The event record window gives the details of last �ve events along with event source in FIFO (First In First Out) sequence.

- This window shows the alarm/pickup source, date and time of occurrence.

- Click Refresh to retrieve the last stored event records.

- Click Report to generate a report of event records with date and time.

Event Records

� Click on Start Curve tab to view the last starting curve stored by the Relay. Press Plot Graph to plot the graph of starting current Vs time. The curve stored can also be compared with the present curve using the Compare Graph option.

- This window shows the alarm/pickup source, date and time of occurrence.

- Click Refresh to retrieve the last stored event records.

- Click Report to generate a report of event records with date and time.


USER INTERAFCE

Control

Motor Start 1: to start the motor in forward direction.

Motor Start 2: to start the motor in reverse direction.

Trip Reset: to reset the trip condition of the Relay.

Special Commands

The user can send individual commands to the Relay using Special Command option. Special Command is used to check the Relay status and also can used for diagnostic and troubleshooting purpose.

Click on Special Command tab to enter the command terminal. The status bar shows the status of the sent command and action taken.

Note: Control option can be used only when the MCOMP Suite is online.

Memory Dump

Memory Dump option is an administrative command used to create for different system �les of the Relay. Click on Start Dump option to dump the default settings into the Relay and the status bar will show the progress. After completion of memory dump, the MCOMP Suite will give a message as Memory Dump completed. Then close the pop-up window using Close option.

Caution: Memory Dump command is not recommended during normal operation; should be strictly used only under guidance of the manufacturer.

Note: On occurrence of any error if the MCOMP is not connected, then MCOMP Suite will show an error message Error in writing�. Check the connection between MCOMP Suite and the Relay for resolving an error.


USER INTERAFCE

Con�guration Mode

Click on Switch to Con�guration Mode tab to enter into con�guration mode, the following window appears:

Note: The user can shift to con�guration mode if the Relay is of�ine. In con�guration mode the user can set the

following parameters:

� System settings

� Protection settings

� Communication settings

� IO settings

� Parameter settings


USER INTERAFCE

Different �le operations can be carried out using following:

Read Selected

This option is used to read selected con�guration �les from the Relay.

1. Click on Read Selected tab to read only the selected con�guration parameters. The MCOMP Suite will prompt the user to save the con�guration or not. Select Yes to save the con�guration else select No.

2. Enter a name to save the con�guration �le in the below window.

3. After saving the con�guration, the MCOMP Suite prompts the user to read the �le. Select Yes option in the pop-up window to read the �le.

4. After completion, the MCOMP will give a message as, All Files read Successfully!!!.

5. If MCOMP Suite is unable to read the �le from MCOMP, it will give an error message as Read failed�

Write Selected

This option is used to write selected con�guration �les into the Relay.

1. Click on Write Selected tab, MCOMP Suite will prompt a warning message as �Online con�guration of MCOMP Relay (when motor is running) is not recommended�. Select OK to proceed or cancel to abort the write operation.

2. MCOMP Suite will prompt to con�rm if the con�guration needs to be saved. Select YES to save the con�guration in case user wants to save the �le.


USER INTERAFCE

3. Enter a name to save the con�guration �le and click Save.

4. After saving the con�guration, MCOMP Suite will prompt for con�rmation to write the �le. Select Yes to write the con�guration else select NO.

5. After completion, the MCOMP will give a message as, File Write Successful!!

6. If MCOMP Suite is unable to write the �le to MCOMP, it will give an error message as Failed to write �le�.

Read All

This option can be used to read all the con�guration �les from the Relay. Operation philosophy is the same as of Read Selected �le menu. After read completion, the MCOMP will give a message as, All Files read Successfully!!!.

Write All

This option can be used to write all the con�guration �les into the Relay. Operation philosophy is the same as of Write Selected �le menu. After write completion, the MCOMP will give a message as, All Setting Files written Successful!!!.

Note: It is strictly recommended to perform �read all� operation before writing any

settings into the MCOMP relay.

New File

New File is used to save all the parameters into a new con�guration �le.

Save File

Save File is used to save the �le into the current con�guration �le (if the �le exists).

Open File

Open File is used to open and load the �le from existing con�guration �le into M COMP Suite.


USER INTERAFCE

Con�guring System Settings

System settings determine the starting method and general motor characteristics. The following settings are available under system settings:

Click on System Settings tab to view the available setting using MCOMP Suite:

To navigate to the motor Settings, follow the path shown below:

SystemSettings

MotorSettings

Set value for particularparameter

Write All/ WriteSelected

The motor setting window displays all the available parameter settings. Some of them are shown below:


USER INTERAFCE

To navigate to the Starter Settings, follow the path shown below:

SystemSettings

StarterSettings

Set Type, mode ofparameter

Write All/ WriteSelected

The starter setting window displays all the available parameter settings:

Con�guring Protection Settings

Protection Settings allow the user to set different alarm/pick-up values and con�guration time delays for each protection provided in the Relay.

Click on Protection Setting tab to view the following window:

Note: Follow the same procedure for other system settings.


USER INTERAFCE

To navigate to the Earth Fault Settings, follow the path shown below:

ProtectionSettings

EarthFault

Set pick-up, alarm/trip,delay as required

Write All / WriteSelected

The earth fault window displays all the available parameter settings.

Con�guring Communication Settings

Communication Settings allow the user to set the parameters for Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP/IP and Pro�bus Communication protocol. The communication settings available in the Relay will

be displayed according to its hardware.

Click on Communication Settings tab to view the following window:

Note: Follow the same procedure for other system settings.

Modbus Settings:

To navigate to the Modbus Settings, follow the path shown below:

CommunicationSettings

Modbus/Pro�bus/Ethernet selection

Set requiredvalues


Note: Protocol selection is possible only in Admin mode.


USER INTERAFCE

The Modbus setting window displays all the available settings.

Pro�bus DP Settings:

To navigate to the Pro�bus Settings, follow the path shown below:

The pro�bus setting window displays all the available settings.

Modbus TCP/IP Settings:

To navigate to the Pro�bus Settings, follow the path shown below:

The Modbus TCP/IP setting window displays all the available settings.



Set requirednode address




Set requiredvalues Selected Write All / Write

Note: In case of Time synchronization using SNTP, enter correct SNTP address and time zone.


USER INTERAFCE

Con�guring IO Settings

IO settings allow the user to con�gure the basic, expansion digital Inputs/ digital outputs and analog outputs as applicable.

Click on IO Settings tab to view following window:

Click on IO Settings option to view all available DIOs and Analog output available in the basic Relay.


USER INTERAFCE

To navigate to the Digital Input Settings, follow the path shown below:

IOSettings

Select DigitalInput as required

Set requiredparameters


The Digital Input window displays all the available settings.

If selected input is interlock, select interlock con�guration as shown in the following screen.

To navigate to the Digital Output Settings, follow the path shown below:

IOSettings

Select DigitalOutput as required



Note : Follow the same procedure for other Digital Inputs.User can not assign one Type to two digital inputs.

The Digital Output window displays all the available settings.


USER INTERAFCE

To navigate to the Analog Output Settings, follow the path shown below:

The Analog Output window displays all the available settings

To navigate to the External IO Settings, follow the path shown below:

Click on External DIO Module number and ID option and select Module Type. Below screen shows all available settings.

IOSettings

Select AnalogOutput



IOSettings

Select requiredexternal IO module



Note: Follow the same procedure for other expansion IO modules.

Note: Follow the same procedure for other Digital Outputs.If the output is selected as HEATER, select the heater delay time in seconds.


USER INTERAFCE

Con�guring Parameter Mapping

Parameter Mapping allows the user to select parameters and store them in a contiguous Fast scan Register. In case of Modbus RTU, the fast scan register stores up to 16 words and for Modbus TCP/IP up to 32 words.

To navigate to the Parameter Mapping Settings, follow the path shown below:

ParameterMapping

Selectparameter

Add/removeparameter


Click on Parameter Mapping tab to view all available parameter mapping option.

Note: Memory Map Option is used only when communication protocol select is as Modbus RTU or Modbus TCP/IP.


USER INTERAFCE

Con�guring COMPlogic

Click on COMPlogic tab to view all available COMPlogic modules.

To navigate to the 3I/1O Truth Table, follow the path shown below:

COMPlogicSettings

3I/1Otruth table

Select I/Pparameter

SelectGates


Click on 3I/1O Truth Table tab to view all available setting options.

Note: Follow the same procedure for all COMPlogic modules.


USER INTERAFCE

Display Interface

The Display is used an operator interface to view/edit the Relay settings and can also be used for metering, monitoring and control of the Relay. The Display acts as a mediator between the Relay and the MCOMP Suite on PC with the help of USB cable. Figure 9-1 : Display shows the Display and Table 9�2 shows the Display element description. For Display overview and connection details refer Installation chapter.

Figure 9-1: Display

Table 9-2: Display Element Description

Label

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Function

Green when the Display is powered ON and red when it is fetching/processing datafrom/to the Relay.

Same as Drive Status LED of the Relay.

Same as Alarm/Pickup LED of the Relay.

Same as Trip LED of the Relay.

Resets the Trip status of the Relay.

Move into the previous level within a menu or a function.

Move into the next level within a menu or a function.

Connect to a PC for configuring the Relay through the MCOMP Suite.

Move the menu, Setting value increase/decrease.

OLED Display for monitoring the readings, viewing settings and records.

Element

Communication/ Power LED

Drive Status LED

Alarm/Pickup LED

Trip LED

Reset Key

Return Key

Enter Key

USB front port

Navigation Keys

OLED Display

Operation Guide

Power on the Display as discussed in Installation chapter.

After Power On, the following screen appears with PWR/COMM LED showing green color.

When the Display is not connected to the Relay then it will continue to show the above screen. When communication is

Ver X.XX

healthy between the Display and the Relay then following screen will appear. It is the default screen of the Display.

Ir : 0.0A

Iy : 0.0A

Ib : 0.0A

Iavg : 0.0A

Note: The values of measurement shown in the above screen are for representational purpose only. The Display will show the actual values measured by the Relay.


USER INTERAFCE

Press ENT key to get Menu screen shown below. It has six icons. User can navigate to the desired icon by using UP/DOWN keys.

Metering: View all meteringparameters.

Settings: View / Edit all settingparameters.

View Record: View details of tripand event records.

Commands: Issue commands tothe Relay.

Display: Change Display relatedsettings like contrast, language etc,.

Connect To PC: The Display entersin the PC connection mode whereuser can configure the Relay withthe MCOMP Suite through theDisplay.

Icon Description

Metering

To view metering parameters, select METERING icon from the icon screen using the navigation arrow keys.

Press ENT key to view Metering parameters. Press UP/DOWN navigation key for viewing various metering parameters.

Metering

Ir

Iy

Ib

: 0.0A

: 0.0A

: 0.0A

Parameter

Line current values

Earth fault current

Percentage Current-Unbalance

Average current value

Line, Phase voltage values

Average voltage value

Frequency

All types of total power consumption

Active Energy

Power Factor

CM Type

Thermal Capacity Level

PTC Resistance

Phase sequence

Motor starting time

Temperature

No of stops

Motor run hrs

Total Motor Run hrs


Digital Input/Output Status

Ir, Iy, Ib

Io% IUB

Iavg

Vry, Vyb, Vbr, Vr, Vy, Vb

Vavg

Freq

kW, KVAr, KVA

KWh

PF

CM Type

TherC

PTC Res

PhSeq

Tstart

Temp

No Stps

Hr Run

T Hr Run

StrPkI

Digital I/O

Notation on the Display

Table 9�4 lists all parameters notation displayed in metering screen:

Table 9-4 : Display metering Notations

Table 9-3: Display icon description

Metering

Metering


USER INTERAFCE

Settings

To view/edit settings of the Relay, select Settings icon in the menu screen.

The Display settings can be viewed in edit able mode or non-edit able mode. If the user presses ENT key on menu screen after selecting Settings icon, the Display will prompt to select the mode. The Display shows two options as follows:

In Edit mode, user can edit or change the setting parameters and apply the same in the Relay. In View mode, user can only view the setting parameters currently stored in the Relay.

On the selection of Edit mode, the Display will prompt for a four digit password for authenticity. Valid password range is from 0000 to 9999.

To enter password, use UP/DOWN arrow to select the digit. Press ENT key to save the current digit and to move to the next digit. Repeat the same procedure for other digits.

Once the correct password is entered, Settings screen will be displayed as shown below:

The Settings screen consists of four con�guration �les, which can be viewed and/or edited.

1. System

2. Protection

3. Digital I/O

4. Communication

Settings

Edit

View

PASSWORD

X X X X

Settings

System

Protection

Digital I/O

System Settings

Select System from the Settings menu and press ENT key to enter in to system settings.

To set the each system setting parameter, follow the procedure given in Relay Con�guration through the Display.

Protection Settings

Select Protection from the Settings menu and press ENT key.

The list of Protections will be displayed. Use UP/DOWN arrow keys to navigate to all other Protections.

Select the required parameter by pressing UP/DOWN key and press ENT key to change the settings.

Press ENT key to enter the Overload Settings.

To set the each protection parameter, follow the procedure given in Relay Con�guration through the Display.

Settings

Full load Current

Motor Voltage

Auxiliary Supply

Settings

System

Protection

Digital I/O

Protection

Overload

Locked Rotor

Phase Reversal

Overload

Iset

Al Set

ThMem

: 100.0% I�c

: 95.0% Tm

: Enable

Settings


USER INTERAFCE

To set communication parameters, follow the procedure given in Relay Con�guration through the Display.

View Records

To view trip/event records of the Relay, select View Records icon by navigating in the main menu screen using up/down arrows.

Press ENT key to enter into records screen. User can view two types of records:

Trip records

At any given time, maximum �ve Trip records can be stored in First In First Out (FIFO) sequence. Press ENT key to view trip records.

Following parameters are available in Trip records:

� Trip cause

� Date

� Time

� Currents (Ir, Iy, IB, Ie)

� Voltages (Vr, Vy, Vb)

� Frequency

� Temperature

� PTC resistance

Use UP/DOWN arrow keys to navigate to the Trip Record 1. Press ENT key to see trip records. Press UP/DOWN key to see all trip record parameters.

VIEW RECORDS

Digital I/O Settings

Select Digital I/O from the settings menu and press ENT key.

Press ENT key to con�gure respective Digital I/O and analog output.

Select the required input by pressing UP/DOWN key and press ENT key to con�gure the settings.

To set any digital input/output and analog output, follow the procedure given in Relay Con�guration through the Display.

Communication Settings

Select Communication from the settings menu and press ENT key.

Press ENT key to con�gure respective communication protocol depending on the Relay hardware con�guration.

Modbus communication settings:

Note: Type �eld is not editable through the Display and it is �xed as per hardware con�guration.

Settings

System

Protection

Digital I/O

Digital I/O

Digital I/P1

Digital I/P2

Digital I/P3

Digital I/P 1

Type

T Valid

: None

: 0.10 Sec

Settings

Protection

Digital I/O

Communication

Communication

Type

Mode

Node

: Modbus

: RTU

: 1

View Records

Trip

Event

Trip

Trip Counter

Trip Record 1

Trip Record 2


USER INTERAFCE

Event Records

At any given time, maximum �ve Event records can be stored in First In First Out (FIFO) sequence. Press ENT key to view event records.

Following parameters are available in Event records:

� Event source (alarm or pickup)

� Date

� Time

� Event cause

Use UP/DOWN arrow keys to navigate to the Event Record 1. Press ENT key to see trip records. Press UP/DOWN key to see all event record parameters.

Commands

Commands can be sent to the Relay from the Commands menu

of the Display. Select COMMANDS icon to from main Menu screen and press ENT key to enter in to command menu.

After pressing ENT key, the Display will prompt for password. Enter the valid password to access various commands. For procedure to enter password refer Relay Con�guration through the Display in Settings chapter.

Press ENT key to view Commands. Press UP/DOWN keys for other commands.

Select the command to be given to the Relay and press ENT key to send command to the Relay. A message saying CMD SENT will be displayed on successful operation.

Display Settings

Select the Display icon on the main menu screen to change the Display settings and press ENT key to enter into Display menu.

Press ENT key to edit the Display parameters.

COMMANDS

Note: Follow the same procedure for other Trip records.

Note that Trip records will only be displayed if Trip counter is not zero. If Trip record value is say one, then only one record will be displayed on screen and maximum of �ve records can be viewed from the Display even Trip counter value greater than �ve.

Follow the same procedure for other Event records.

Note that Trip records will only be displayed if event counter is not zero. If event record value is say one, then only one record will be displayed on screen and maximum of �ve records can be viewed from the Display even event counter value greater than �ve.

Trip Record 1

11/11/2010

11:55:10:600

Ir : 10.0A

Event

Event Counter

Event Counter 1

Event Counter 2

Event Record 1

Fault : PickUp

11/11/2010

11:55:10:600

Display

Language

Logo Display

Contrast Value

Commands

Motor Start 2

Motor Stop

MCOMP Reset

CMD Sent

Commands

Motor Start 2

Motor Stop

MCOMP Reset

DISPLAY


USER INTERAFCE

The Display setting consists of �ve parameters, which can be viewed and/or edited:

� Language

� Logo display

� Contrast value

� Power save

� Rolling display

Connect to PC

In this mode, the Relay can be connected to the MCOMP Suite through USB port of the Display.

To enter in this mode, connect USB cable from front port available on the Display to computer's USB port.

Select the CONNECT TO PC icon on the main menu screen and press ENT key to enter in to Connect to PC menu.

Press ENT key, the Display will prompt for con�rmation as shown below.

Press ENT key to select YES and to enter into PC mode. The following screen will appear once the Display is connected to computer.

Press return key to end this mode, the Display will prompt for con�rmation as follows:

Select YES to end the PC mode.

CONNECT TO PC ?

YES

NO

Con�g Mode

Disconnect ?

YES

NO

CONNECT TO PC

TESTING ANDTROUBLESHOOTING



TESTING & TROUBLESHOOTING

Overview

This section allows the user to acknowledge and troubleshoot any problems encountered during testing and commissioning of the Relay.

A complete functional check and calibration has been performed for each unit before it is shipped to ensure that the relay is fully functional. For testing and troubleshooting the relay at site, the reference data provided herein helps the user to check if the relay is functioning as per the desired speci�cation and is properly connected in the motor feeder for the control inputs and outputs.

Testing

The procedure described in this section helps the user to enter settings into the relay, verify the relay connection and tests the functional behavior of the relay. It is not necessary to test every function of the relay to verify the relay�s behavior. Brief functional tests ensure that the relay is operational as per the settings done in the relay.

Connection Setup Requirement

Apart from the relay main unit, CM unit and connecting cables, the 3 phase power source like Omicron, Freza, Doble is required to test the relay.

Metering testing

Phase current and voltage:

Connect the MCOMP CM unit with the base unit with the pre-fabricated CM cable provided with the current module unit. Pass R-Y-B phase current cables of current source i.e. testing kit through the R-Y-B pass through holes of MCOMP current module opening and short them with neutral of the test kit. Wire 3 phase voltages with neutral to the voltage terminal present on the MCOMP base unit (assuming it is 3P-4W system).

For balanced system, set the equal magnitude of all the 3 phases (current and voltage) with balanced angles in the test kit & apply to the relay making balanced system. The applied values should be greater than 10% of the set IFLC and VN values. Observe the current and voltage magnitude & compare with the expected metering by taking CT/PT ratio into consideration (if enabled). Earth fault current, Current Unbalance in metering should be zero.

For unbalance system, set the different magnitude & angles for the all the 3 phases (current and voltage) in the test kit & apply to the relay making the system unbalanced. Observe the current and voltage magnitude of all phases and compare with the expected metering by taking CT/PT ratio into consideration (if enabled).

Power, Energy & Power factor:

a. Connect both current as well as voltage source to the relay.

b. Set the magnitude of the voltage and current as per the requirement of the system.

c. Observe the Active, Reactive and Apparent Power/Energy metering values with the expected values by taking CT & PT ratio into consideration.

d. Observe Power factor & compare with the expected result.

Protection Testing

The protection testing of the relay can be performed on the same setup used for metering testing. The basic protection elements needs to be enabled and set as per the requirement and after injecting the proper values, the protection tripping can be checked. The drive status should be as running status for the relay to give the protection trip command after detecting the fault. Below example shows the protection testing in case of thermal overload.

Table 10-1: Thermal Overload Protection testing

Settings Expected ResultApplied Input

IFLC = 1A ( set as per CM type)

ISET = 100% IFLC

Trip class = 10

Trip in 10.4 secInject the current

IR, IY, IB = 6 A

IFLC = 1A ( set as per CM type)

ISET = 100% IFLC

Trip class = 10

Trip in 42.6 secInject the current

IR, IY, IB = 3 A

Observed Result



Table 10-1: Thermal Overload Protection testing

Table 10-2 (1): Troubleshooting conditions

Problem

Motor notstarting due toInhibit condition.

DiagnosisPossible Causes

If any DI configured as STOPis low.

If any DI configured as INTERLOCK STOP is low.

Thermal Capacity is beyondthe set threshold limit.

Unhealthy 3-phase voltage(if Voltage Connection is enabled).

Motor is in trip condition.

Maximum number of startsexceeds the set permissive limitwithin the set reference period.

Check Inhibit Status through Special commands in MCOMPSuite or Commands in the Display menu.

Make the system healthy by removing the Inhibit condition(s).The relay will not allow to start the motor if inhibit conditionis present. If the motor has been started externally, the relaywill not protect the motor as it is in inhibit condition.

Motor is inhealthy condition(No Inhibit) butnot starting.

The Start Matrix is configuredimproperly in Starter Settings.

Improper DO configuration.

Check Modes of Starting Matrix in Starter Settings using theMCOMP Suite or the Display.

Check DO configuration in IO Settings as per Starter Settings.For DOL - ensure RUN output selection.For RDOL - ensure FORWARD RELAY and REVERSE RELAY selection.For STAR-DELTA - ensure STAR, DELTA and MAIN selection.

Motor is stopping.

If any DI configured asSTOP is low.

If any DI configured asCONTACTOR FEEDBACK is low.

If any DI configured asMAINTAINED START is low.

If any DI configured asINTERLOCK STOP is low.

If Current Auto Stop is enabledand all 3-phase currents are lessthan 10%.

Check the cause for the motor stop through special commandsin the MCOMP Suite or commands in the Display menu.

Check physical wiring.

Ensure that the contactor is picking up.

Set sufficient validation time for the DI in IO settings.

The Relay doesnot measure/display accuratevalues of voltagesand currents.

Full load current setting is notas per the range of the RelayCM type.

3-phase system selection isimproper.

Wiring error.

Incompatibility between the Relayand Display firmware.

Ensure if proper CM type is connected and verify if the CMtype is displayed in Monitoring mode of the MCOMP Suite orMetering menu in the Display. Set proper Full load current (IFLC)and rated voltage in system settings as per the motor rating.

Check for 3-phase 3-wire or 3- phase 4-wire system selection insystem settings.

Check wiring and connection as per the drawing schematics.

Consult the Relay manufacturer.



Problem DiagnosisPossible Causes

The Relay is notresponding to afault.

Improper test source settings.(in case of manual testing ofthe Relay)

Improper wiring.

Ensure the alarm and trip selection is done in the ProtectionSettings for the required fault.

Ensure proper settings in the test source. Also, verify if currentinjection is as per the CM range.

Check the wiring and connections.

The Relay is notbehaving as pernew settings.

New settings are not saved.

Ensure if new settings are saved.

If settings are done through the Display or through theMCOMP Suite (in supervisor or user mode), ensure that theRelay is power recycled after saving the settings.

Special Commands

Table 10�3 shows a list of Special Commands.

Table 10-3: Special Commands

Sr No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

Description

Shows whether the Relay is connected to the MCOMP Suite or not.

Shows the status for running motor, trip, inhibit, etc,.

Shows the status of EEPROM for read operation.

Shows the status of EEPROM for write operation.

Shows the status of setting files and internal file systems.

Used to store the last starting curve, so as to compare the plots in the future.

Shows all possible active causes of inhibit status.

Shows all possible active causes for motor stop.

Shows the time setting present in the Relay

Sets the PC date and time in to the Relay

Clears the thermal content stored in the Relay

Clears all the Energy values stored in the Relay

Clears number of starts stored in the Relay

Clears number of stops stored in the Relay

Clears number of trips stored in the Relay

Clears number of events stored in the Relay

Clears the motor run hours value stored in the Relay

Clears the Total motor run hours value stored in the Relay

Commands

Plug in check

MCOMP Status

Status of EEPROM read

Status of EEPROM Write

Status of the MCOMP file system

Capture starting curve

Inhibit Status

Motor stop cause

Read time from MCOMP

Write PC time to MCOMP

Clear Thermal memory

Clear Energy values

Reset Number Start Command

Reset Number Stops Command

Reset Trip Counter Command

Reset Event Record Counter Command

Reset Motor Run Hours Command

Reset Total Motor Run Hours Command

Table 10-2 (2): Troubleshooting conditions



Inhibit Status

Table 10�4 shows a list of all possible inhibit causes shown by the Relay.

Table 10-4: Inhibit Status

Sr No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

Description

The Relay senses voltage in all 3-phases < 10%.

The Relay senses an under-voltage pick-up condition.

The Relay is in trip mode.

Thermal capacity > Set threshold limit.

No. of starts > Set permissible limit in the set reference period.

DI configured as STOP is low.

DI configured as INTERLOCK STOP is low.

Stop from communication is high

Commands

No Voltage

Under Voltage

Trip

Thermal Capacity

Max. No. of starts

No Stop Input

Interlock 1

Interlock 2

Interlock 3

Interlock 4

Interlock 5

Interlock 6

Interlock 7

Interlock 8

Interlock 9

Interlock 10

Interlock 11

Interlock 12

Communication Stop

Motor Stop Cause

Table 10�5 shows a list of all possible Motor stop causes shownby the Relay.

Table 10-5 (1): Motor Stop Cause

Sr No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

Commands

Motor stopped through trip.

Motor stopped through the HMI/Display stop command.

Motor stopped through the digital input: Stop.

Motor stopped through the Digital Input: EStop.

Motor stopped through the communication stop command.

Motor stopped through the Interlock 1 configured as Stop.










Sr No.

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

Commands





Motor stopped through the Contactor Feedback 1 input.

Motor stopped through Contactor Feedback 2 input.

Motor stopped through the Auto Stop by no voltage.

Motor stopped through the Auto Stop by no current.

Motor stopped as Start1 DI not maintained.




Table 10-5 (2): Motor Stop Cause


ANNEXURE


ANNEXURE A - MEMORY MAPS

Overview

The Relay supports three communication protocols as Modbus serial, Pro�bus DP and Modbus over TCP/IP. The memory map for all these communication protocols is described below.

A] Modbus RTU Memory Map

Modbus RTU memory map enlists all the metering parameters,

trip & event record parameters, DI/DO status and coil status. Function codes for different registers are also mentioned in the memory map. The Modbus RTU memory map shows the addresses for slow scan parameters. The addresses for fast scan parameters will range from 30001 to 30016 and cannot be changed. Different parameters can be con�gured as fast scan parameters at these addresses through MCOMP Suite.

Table A-1 (1): Modbus Memory Map

Settings

R Phase Current

Y Phase Current

B Phase Current

ModbusAddress

31001

31002

31003

Range of data

Min Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)

0

0

0

60000

60000

60000

0.1

0.1

0.1

Unit

A

A

A

Sizein

Bytes

2

2

2

Notes

SF=0.001 for IFLC < 4ASF=0.01 for IFLC < 20ASF=0.1 for IFLC > 20A

Input Register (Function code : 0x04)

Metering Data

Instantaneous RMS Current

Type: Vector Sum==============

SF = 1 for IFLC ��4 ASF = 10 for IFLC ��20 A

SF = 100 for IFLC ��80 ASF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A

Type: CBCT==============

SF = 1

Earth Current 31004 0 60000 0.1 A 2

R Phase Current

Y Phase Current

B Phase Current

31005

31006

31007

0

0

0

60000

60000

60000

0.1

0.1

0.1

A

A

A

2

2

2

SF=0.001 for IFLC < 4ASF=0.01 for IFLC < 20ASF=0.1 for IFLC > 20A

One Second RMS Average Current

Type: Vector Sum==============

SF = 1 for IFLC ��4 ASF = 10 for IFLC ��20 A

SF = 100 for IFLC ��80 ASF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A

Type: CBCT==============

SF = 1

Earth Current 31008 0 60000 1 mA 2

SF = 0.001 for IFLC ��4 ASF = 0.01 for IFLC ��20 ASF = 0.1 for IFLC > 20 A

Average RMSPhase Current

31009 0 60000 1 mA 2

R Phase Current

Y Phase Current

31010

31011

0

0

3500

3500

0.1

0.1

V

V

2

2

Instantaneous RMS Phase Voltage

-

-


MEMORY MAPS

Settings ModbusAddress

Range of data

Min Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Sizein

BytesNotes

B Phase Current 31012 0 3500 0.1 V 2 -

R-Y Line Voltage

Y-B Line Voltage

B-R Line Voltage

31013

31014

31015

0

0

0

6500

6500

6500

0.1

0.1

0.1

V

V

V

2

2

2

Line Voltage

-

-

-

R Phase Voltage

Y Phase Voltage

B Phase Voltage

Average RMSPhase Voltage

31016

31017

31018

31019

0

0

0

0

3500

3500

3500

3500

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.1

V

V

V

V

2

2

2

2

One Second RMS Average Voltage

-

-

-

-

R PhaseActive Power

31020

Phase wise Active Power

0 W 41210000000MSW = 31021LSW = 31020

Y PhaseActive Power

31022 0 W 41210000000MSW = 31023LSW = 31022

B PhaseActive Power

31024 0 W 41210000000MSW = 31025LSW = 31024

R PhaseReactive Power

31026

Phase wise Reactive Power

0 41210000000MSW = 31027LSW = 31026

Y PhaseReactive Power

31028 0 41210000000MSW = 31029LSW = 31028

B PhaseReactive Power

31030 0 VAR 41210000000MSW = 31031LSW = 31030

R PhaseApparent Power

31032

Phase wise Apparent Power

0 VA 41210000000MSW = 31033LSW = 31032

Y PhaseApparent Power

31034 0 VA 41210000000MSW = 31035LSW = 31034

B PhaseApparent Power

31036 0 VA 41210000000MSW = 31037LSW = 31036

VAR

VAR


Total ActivePower

31038

Total Power

0 W 41210000000MSW = 31039LSW = 31038

Total ReactivePower

31040 0 VAR 41210000000MSW = 31041LSW = 31040

Total ApparentPower

31042 0 VA 41210000000MSW = 31043LSW = 31042


MEMORY MAPS


Range of data

Min Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Sizein

BytesNotes

Total ActiveEnergy

31044

Energy

0 Wh 81/36001.65564E+17MSW = 31039LSW = 31038

Total ReactiveEnergy

31048 0 VARh 81/36001.65564E+17MSW = 31041LSW = 31040

Total ApparentEnergy

31052 0 VAh 81/36001.65564E+17MSW = 31043LSW = 31042

Phase Sequence 31056

Other Data

0 - 2-1

Value = 0 for 1-2-3(R-Y-B)

Value = 1 for 1-3-2(R-B-Y)

Temperature 31057 0 0C 20.12000 -

Frequency 31059 0 Hz 20.11000 -

Starting Time 31059 0 Sec 20.110000 -

31060 0 A 20.160000 -Starting PeakCurrent

31061 0 % 40.110000MSW = 31062LSW = 31061

ThermalCapacity

0 = CM TYPE 11 = CM TYPE 22 = CM TYPE 33 = CM TYPE 44 = CM TYPE 5

5 = INTERNAL CM

031063 5CM Detect

Number1 - 2

Reserved 31064 0 20.0011000 --

Motor Operation

31068 0 - 414294967296MSW = 31069LSW = 31068

Number OfStarts

31070 0 Minutes 21/6065535 -Number OfHours Motor Run

31071 0 Minutes 41/604294967296MSW = 31072LSW = 31071

Total Number OfHours Motor Run

31073 0 A 20.160000 -Last Start Amps

31074 0 - 414294967296MSW = 31075LSW = 31074

Number Of Stops


31076.0 0 - --1Value = 0 for low inputValue = 1 for high input

Digital Input 1Status

DI Status 31076 2

31076.1 0 1Value = 0 for low inputValue = 1 for high input


- --



- --


MEMORY MAPS








Range of data

Min Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Sizein

BytesNotes

- --

- --

- --

31076.6To

31076.15Reserved - --- Reserved-

31077.0 0 - --1Value = 0 for low OutputValue = 1 for high Output

Digital Output 1Status

DO Status 31077 2

31077.1 0 1Value = 0 for low OutputValue = 1 for high Output






- --

- --

- --

31077.4To

31077.15Reserved - --- Reserved-

31078.0,31078.1

0 - --3

0 = RTD Protection Enabled1 = PTC Protection Enabled

2 = Both RTD & PTCProtections disabled

Temp. SensorType

Flags 31078 2

0 10 = 3Ph-4W System1 = 3Ph-3W System

System selection 31078.2

0 10 = Voltage Connect Disabled1 = Voltage Connect Enabled

Voltage Connect Flag 31078.3

0 10 -

- --

- --

% 20.131079% Current Unbalance


31080.0 0 - --11 = Start command from

Contactor A0 = Motor Off (Not running)

Contactor A

Logic Status 31080 2

31080.2 0 11 = Remote0 = Local

Local/Remote - --

31080.3 0 11 = DCS Start Available

0 = DCS Start NOT AvailableDCS StartAvailable

- --

31080.4 0 11 = Drive Available

0 = Drive NOT AvailableDrive StartAvailable

- --

31080.1 0 - --11 = Start command from

Contactor B0 = Motor Off (Not running)

Contactor B


MEMORY MAPS


Range of data

Min Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Sizein

BytesNotes

31080.5 0 11 = Drive Running

0 = Drive NOT RunningDrive Running - --

31080.6Alarm - --11 = Alarm

0 = No Alarm0

31080.7 0 11 = Fault (Trip)

0 = No Fault (Trip)Fault - --

31080.8to

31080.15

0 1 -RESERVED - --

31081 - - -Watchdog Register - --

32000Trip Records

Trip Record � 1

32001 0 - 4-1048575MSW = 32002LSW = 32001

Refer Trip Record TableTrip Cause

32003 0 65535 Refer Trip Record TableDate Format - 2-

32004 0 - 4-134217727MSW = 32005LSW = 32004

Refer Trip Record TableTime Format

32006 0 60000R Phase Current A 20.1

32007 0 60000 A 2

32008 0 60000 A 2

Y Phase Current

B Phase Current

0.1

0.1

SF = 0.001 for IFLC <�4 ASF = 0.01 for IFLC <�20 ASF = 0.1 for IFLC > 20 A

Type: Vector Sum==============SF = 1 for IFLC <�4 A

SF = 10 for IFLC <�20 ASF = 100 for IFLC <�80 ASF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A

Type: CBCT==============

SF = 1

EF Current 32009 0 60000 1 mA 2


32010 0 3500R Phase Voltage V 20.1

32011 0 3500 V 2

32012 0 3500 V 2

Y Phase Voltage

B Phase Voltage

0.1

0.1

-

-

-

32013 0 1000 Hz 2Frequency 0.1 -

32014

0 2000 0C

2

RTD Temperature 0.1

If RTD temperature is enabled,Temperature parameter holds

temperature in Degree Celsius.

If PTC temperature protectionis enabled, Temperatureparameter hold PTC Trip

Resistance in ohms

PTC Resistance 0 2000 1 Ω


MEMORY MAPS


Range of data

Min Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Sizein

BytesNotes

32015 0 1000 - 2Power Factor 0.001 -

32016 10 1000 - 2Current Scale Factor 1SF = 0.001 for IFLC <�4 ASF = 0.01 for IFLC <�20 ASF = 0.1 for IFLC > 20 A



Type: CBCT==============

SF = 1

Earth CurrentScale Factor

32017 1 1000 1 - 2

0 = RTD TemperatureProtection

1 = PTC TemperatureProtection

2 = RTD & PTCTemperature Protection

Disabled

Temp. SensorType

32018.0

32018.10 2 - -

32018.2 0 10 = 3Ph-4W System0 = 3Ph-3W System

SystemSelection flag

-

2

-

32018.3 0 1 -Voltage Connect

Flag -0 = Voltage Connect

Disabled1 = Voltage Connect

Enabled


Trip Record � 2

32019 0 - 4-1048575MSW = 32020LSW = 32019



32022 0 - 4-134217727MSW = 32023LSW = 32022



32025 0 60000 A 2

32026 0 60000 A 2

Y Phase Current

B Phase Current

0.1

0.1




Type: CBCT==============

SF = 1

EF Current 32027 0 60000 1 mA 2


MEMORY MAPS


Range of data

Min Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Sizein

BytesNotes


32029 0 3500 V 2

32030 0 3500 V 2

Y Phase Voltage

B Phase Voltage

0.1

0.1

-

-

-

32031 0 1000 Hz 2Frequency 0.1 -

32032

0 2000 0C

2

RTD Temperature 0.1If RTD temperature is enabled,Temperature parameter holds

temperature in Degree Celsius.If PTC temperature protection

is enabled, Temperatureparameter hold PTC Trip

Resistance in ohmsPTC Resistance 0 2000 1 Ω

32033 0 1000 - 2Power Factor 0.001 -




Type: CBCT==============

SF = 1


32035 1 1000 1 - 2





Disabled

Temp. SensorType

32036.0

32036.10 2 - -



-2

-




Enabled

Trip Record � 3

32037 0 - 4-1048575MSW = 32038LSW = 32037



32040 0 - 4-134217727MSW = 32041LSW = 32040



MEMORY MAPS


Range of data

Min Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Sizein

BytesNotes


32043 0 60000 A 2

32044 0 60000 A 2

Y Phase Current

B Phase Current

0.1

0.1




Type: CBCT==============

SF = 1

EF Current 32045 0 60000 1 mA 2


32047 0 3500 V 2

32048 0 3500 V 2

Y Phase Voltage

B Phase Voltage

0.1

0.1

-

-

-

32049 0 1000 Hz 2Frequency 0.1 -

32050

0 2000 0C

2

RTD Temperature 0.1




Resistance in ohms



32051 0 1000 - 2Power Factor 0.001 -




Type: CBCT==============

SF = 1


32053 1 1000 1 - 2




Disabled

Temp. SensorType

32054.0

32054.10 2 - -



-

2

-


MEMORY MAPS


Range of data

Min Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Sizein

BytesNotes

232054.3 0 1 -

Voltage ConnectFlag -

0 = Voltage ConnectDisabled

1 = Voltage ConnectEnabled

Trip Record � 4

32055 0 - 4-1048575MSW = 32056LSW = 32055



32058 0 - 4-134217727MSW = 32059LSW = 32058



32061 0 60000 A 2

32062 0 60000 A 2

Y Phase Current

B Phase Current

0.1

0.1




Type: CBCT==============

SF = 1

EF Current 32063 0 60000 1 mA 2



32065 0 3500 V 2

32066 0 3500 V 2

Y Phase Voltage

B Phase Voltage

0.1

0.1

-

-

-

32067 0 1000 Hz 2Frequency 0.1 -

32068

0 2000 0C

2

RTD Temperature 0.1




Resistance in ohms


32069 0 1000 - 2Power Factor 0.001 -



MEMORY MAPS


Range of data

Min Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Sizein

BytesNotes



Type: CBCT==============

SF = 1


32071 1 1000 1 - 2




Disabled

Temp. SensorType

32072.0

32072.10 2 - -



- 2-




Enabled

Trip Record � 5

32073 0 - 4-1048575MSW = 32074LSW = 32073



32076 0 - 4-134217727MSW = 32077LSW = 32076




32079 0 60000 A 2

32080 0 60000 A 2

Y Phase Current

B Phase Current

0.1

0.1


32085 0 1000 Hz 2Frequency 0.1 -


32083 0 3500 V 2

32084 0 3500 V 2

Y Phase Voltage

B Phase Voltage

0.1

0.1

-

-

-



Type: CBCT==============

SF = 1

EF Current 32081 0 60000 1 mA 2


MEMORY MAPS


Range of data

Min Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Sizein

BytesNotes

32086

0 2000 0C

2

RTD Temperature 0.1




Resistance in ohms


32087 0 1000 - 2Power Factor 0.001 -




Type: CBCT==============

SF = 1


32089 1 1000 1 -

2




Disabled

Temp. SensorType

32090.0

32090.10 2 - -




-

2

-




Enabled

32091 0 4294967296MSW = 32092LSW = 32091

Trip counter -- 4

Event Records 33001

EVENT Record � 1

0 1048575 --

MSW = 33002LSW = 33001

Refer Event RecordTable

433001Event Source

Event Cause 33003 0 3 -- 2 Refer Event Record Table

Date Format 33004 0 65535 -- 2 Refer Event Record Table

0 134217727 --MSW = 32006LSW = 32005

Refer Event Record Table433005Time Format


MEMORY MAPS


Range of data

Min Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Sizein

BytesNotes

EVENT Record � 2

0 1048575 --

MSW = 33008LSW = 33007


433007Event Source



0 134217727 --MSW = 32012LSW = 32011


EVENT Record � 3

0 1048575 --

MSW = 33014LSW = 33013


433013Event Source



0 134217727 --MSW = 32018LSW = 32017



EVENT Record � 4

0 1048575 --

MSW = 33020LSW = 33019


433019Event Source



0 134217727 --MSW = 32024LSW = 32023


EVENT Record � 5

0 1048575 --

MSW = 33026LSW = 33025


433025Event Source



0 134217727 --MSW = 32030LSW = 32029


0 4294967296 -- MSW = 33032LSW = 33031

433031Event Counter


MEMORY MAPS

Table A-2 (1): Trip Record Cause Table

Event Source

The Relay stores last �ve trip records in its non-volatile memory. The memory addressing format for date, time and trip cause is shown in Table A�1. Bits in register are assigned unique fault cause. When the motor trips, the corresponding fault bit(s) will be

set high and rest all other fault bits remain low. In healthy condition all bits will be in reset condition. The date and time of fault will be stored in its corresponding address.

Example forFast Scan; if

addressconfigured as

TripRecord 1

TripRecord 2

TripRecord 3

TripRecord 4

TripRecord 5

Trip Records

Trip Cause

MSW=32012

LSW=32011

32011.0

32011.1

32011.2

32011.3

32011.4

........MSW=32074

LSW=32073

32073.0

32073.1

32073.2

32073.3

32073.4

MSW=32056

LSW=32055

32055.0

32055.1

32055.2

32055.3

32055.4

MSW=32038

LSW=32037

32037.0

32037.1

32037.2

32037.3

32037.4

MSW=32020

LSW=32019

32019.0

32019.1

32019.2

32019.3

32019.4

MSW=32002

LSW=32001

32001.0

32001.1

32001.2

32001.3

32001.4

Overload

Locked Rotor

Earth Fault

Under current

CurrentUnbalance

Over Voltage

Under Voltage

RTD Temperature

OverFrequency

Under Frequency

Phase Loss

Phase Reversal

Successive Start

Interlock-1

VoltageUnbalance

ExcessiveStart Time

32011.5

32011.6

32011.7

32073.5

32073.6

32073.7

32055.5

32055.6

32055.7

32037.5

32037.6

32037.7

32019.5

32019.6

32019.7

32001.5

32001.6

32001.7

32011.8

32011.9

32073.8

32073.9

32055.8

32055.9

32037.8

32037.9

32019.8

32019.9

32001.8

32001.9

32011.1032073.1032055.1032037.1032019.10

32019.11

32001.10

32001.11 32011.11

32011.12

32073.11

32073.12

32055.11

32055.12

32037.11

32037.1232019.12

32019.13

32001.12

32001.13 32011.1332073.1332055.1332037.13

32019.1432001.14 32011.14

32011.15

32073.14

32073.15

32055.14

32055.15

32037.14

32037.1532019.1532001.15

MSW=32012

LSW=32011

32012.0

32012.1

32012.2

32012.3

........MSW=32074

LSW=32073

32074.0

32074.1

32074.2

32074.3

MSW=32056

LSW=32055

32056.0

32056.1

32056.2

32056.3

MSW=32038

LSW=32037

32038.0

32038.1

32038.2

32038.3

MSW=32020

LSW=32019

32020.0

32020.1

32020.2

32020.3

MSW=32002

LSW=32001

32002.0

32002.1

32002.2

32002.3

Interlock-2

Interlock-3

Fail to Stop

Over Current

PTC ResponseResistance

32020.432002.4 32012.432074.432056.432038.4


MEMORY MAPS

Example forFast Scan; if

addressconfigured as

TripRecord 1

TripRecord 2

TripRecord 3

TripRecord 4

TripRecord 5

Trip Records

Trip Cause

PTC ShortCircuit

32020.532002.5 32012.532074.532056.532038.5

PTC OpenCircuit

32020.632002.6 32012.632074.632056.632038.6

Interlock 4

Interlock 5

Interlock 6

Interlock 7

Interlock 8

Interlock 9

Interlock 10

Interlock 11

Interlock 12

32002.7

32002.8

32002.9

32002.10

32002.11

32002.12

32002.13

32002.14

32002.15

32020.7

32020.8

32020.9

32020.10

32020.11

32020.12

32020.13

32020.14

32020.15

32038.7

32038.8

32038.9

32038.10

32038.11

32038.12

32038.13

32038.14

32038.15

32056.7

32056.8

32056.9

32056.10

32056.11

32056.12

32056.13

32056.14

32056.15

32074.7

32074.8

32074.9

32074.10

32074.11

32074.12

32074.13

32074.14

32074.15

32012.7

32012.8

32012.9

32012.10

32012.11

32012.12

32012.13

32012.14

32012.15


TripRecord 1

TripRecord 2

TripRecord 3

TripRecord 4

TripRecord 5

Trip Records

Day

Date FormatAddress

32003

32003.0

32003.1

32003.2

32003.3

32003.4

32003.5

32003.6

32003.7

32003.8

32003.9

32003.10

32003.11

32003.12

32003.13

32003.14

32003.15

32021

32021.0

32021.1

32021.2

32021.3

32021.4

32021.5

32021.6

32021.7

32021.8

32021.9

32021.10

32021.11

32021.12

32021.13

32021.14

32021.15

32039

32039.0

32039.1

32039.2

32039.3

32039.4

32039.5

32039.6

32039.7

32039.8

32039.9

32039.10

32039.11

32039.12

32039.13

32039.14

32039.15

32075

32075.0

32075.1

32075.2

32075.3

32075.4

32075.5

32075.6

32075.7

32075.8

32075.9

32075.10

32075.11

32075.12

32075.13

32075.14

32075.15

32057

32057.0

32057.1

32057.2

32057.3

32057.4

32057.5

32057.6

32057.7

32057.8

32057.9

32057.10

32057.11

32057.12

32057.13

32057.14

32057.15

Month

Year



MEMORY MAPS


TripRecord 1

TripRecord 2

TripRecord 3

TripRecord 4

TripRecord 5

Trip Records

Hours

32004.0

32004.1

32004.2

32004.3

32004.4

32022.0

32022.1

32022.2

32022.3

32022.4

32040.0

32040.1

32040.2

32040.3

32040.4

32076.0

32076.1

32076.2

32076.3

32076.4

32058.0

32058.1

32058.2

32058.3

32058.4

Time Format

Minutes

32004.5

32004.6

32004.7

32004.8

32004.9

32004.10

32022.5

32022.6

32022.7

32022.8

32022.9

32022.10

32040.5

32040.6

32040.7

32040.8

32040.9

32040.10

32076.5

32076.6

32076.7

32076.8

32076.9

32076.10

32058.5

32058.6

32058.7

32058.8

32058.9

32058.10

Reserved

32004.11

32004.12

32004.13

32004.14

32004.15

32005.0

32005.1

32005.2

32005.3

32005.4

32005.5

32005.6

32005.7

32005.8

32005.9

32005.10

32005.11

32005.12

32005.13

32005.14

32005.15

32022.11

32022.12

32022.13

32022.14

32022.15

32023.0

32023.1

32023.2

32023.3

32023.4

32023.5

32023.6

32023.7

32023.8

32023.9

32023.10

32023.11

32023.12

32023.13

32023.14

32023.15

32040.11

32040.12

32040.13

32040.14

32040.15

32041.0

32041.1

32041.2

32041.3

32041.4

32041.5

32041.6

32041.7

32041.8

32041.9

32041.10

32041.11

32041.12

32041.13

32041.14

32041.15

32076.11

32076.12

32076.13

32076.14

32076.15

32077.0

32077.1

32077.2

32077.3

32077.4

32077.5

32077.6

32077.7

32077.8

32077.9

32076.10

32077.11

32077.12

32077.13

32077.14

32077.15

32058.11

32058.12

32058.13

32058.14

32058.15

32059.0

32059.1

32059.2

32059.3

32059.4

32059.5

32059.6

32059.7

32059.8

32059.9

32059.10

32059.11

32059.12

32059.13

32059.14

32059.15

Seconds

Milliseconds

MSWLSW

3200532004

3202332022

3204132040

3205932058

3207732076


MEMORY MAPS

Event Record Table

The Relay stores last �ve event records in its non-volatile memory. The memory addressing format for date, time and event cause is shown in Table A�3 Bits in register are assigned unique event cause. In the occurrence of any pickup or alarm state, the

corresponding event bit(s) will be set high and rest all other event bits will remain low. In healthy condition all bits will be in reset condition. The date and time of event will be stored in its corresponding address.

Table A-3 (1): Event Record Cause Table

EventRecord 1

EventRecord 2

EventRecord 3

EventRecord 4

EventRecord 5

33002

33001

33008

33007

33014

33013

33020

33019

33026

33025

Event Records

33001.0

33001.1

33001.2

33001.3

33001.4

33001.5

33001.6

33001.7

33001.8

33001.9

33001.10

33001.11

33001.12

33001.13

33001.14

33001.15

33007.0

33007.1

33007.2

33007.3

33007.4

33007.5

33007.6

33007.7

33007.8

33007.9

33007.10

33007.11

33007.12

33007.13

33007.14

33007.15

33013.0

33013.1

33013.2

33013.3

33013.4

33013.5

33013.6

33013.7

33013.8

33013.9

33013.10

33013.11

33013.12

33013.13

33013.14

33013.15

33025.0

33025.1

33025.2

33025.3

33025.4

33025.5

33025.6

33025.7

33025.8

33025.9

33025.10

33025.11

33025.12

33025.13

33025.14

33025.15

33019.0

33019.1

33019.2

33019.3

33019.4

33019.5

33019.6

33019.7

33019.8

33019.9

33019.10

33019.11

33019.12

33019.13

33019.14

33019.15

Overload

Locked Rotor

Earth Fault

Under current

Current Unbalance

Over Voltage

Under Voltage

Voltage Unbalance

RTD Temperature

Over Frequency

Under Frequency

Phase Loss

Phase Reversal


Successive Start

Interlock-1

33002.0

33002.1

33002.2

33002.3

33002.4

33002.5

33002.6

33002.7

33002.8

33008.0

33008.1

33008.2

33008.3

33008.4

33008.5

33008.6

33008.7

33008.8

33014.0

33014.1

33014.2

33014.3

33014.4

33014.5

33014.6

33014.7

33014.8

33026.0

33026.1

33026.2

33026.3

33026.4

33026.5

33026.6

33026.7

33026.8

33020.0

33020.1

33020.2

33020.3

33020.4

33020.5

33020.6

33020.7

33020.8

Interlock-2

Interlock-3

Fail to Stop

Over Current

PTC ResponseResistance

PTC Short Circuit

PTC Open Circuit

Reserved

33002.9 33008.9 33014.9 33026.933020.9

MSW

LSW

Event Source


MEMORY MAPS

EventRecord 1

EventRecord 2

EventRecord 3

EventRecord 4

EventRecord 5

33002.10

33002.11

33002.12

33002.13

33002.14

33002.15

33008.10

33008.11

33008.12

33008.13

33008.14

33008.15

33014.10

33014.11

33014.12

33014.13

33014.14

33014.15

33026.10

33026.11

33026.12

33026.13

33026.14

33026.15

33020.10

33020.11

33020.12

33020.13

33020.14

33020.15

33002

33001

33008

33007

33014

33013

33020

33019

33026

33025

MSW

LSW

Event Source

Event Records

Reserved

33003

33003.0

33003.1

33009

33009.0

33009.1

33015

33015.0

33015.1

33021

33021.0

33021.1

33027

33027.0

33027.1

Address

Event Cause

Alarm

Pick up

33003

33003.2

33003.3

33003.4

33003.5

33003.6

33003.7

33003.8

33003.9

33003.10

33003.11

33003.12

33003.13

33003.14

33003.15

33009

33009.2

33009.3

33009.4

33009.5

33009.6

33009.7

33009.8

33009.9

33009.10

33009.11

33009.12

33009.13

33009.14

33009.15

33015

33015.2

33015.3

33015.4

33015.5

33015.6

33015.7

33015.8

33015.9

33015.10

33015.11

33015.12

33015.13

33015.14

33015.15

33021

33021.2

33021.3

33021.4

33021.5

33021.6

33021.7

33021.8

33021.9

33021.10

33021.11

33021.12

33021.13

33021.14

33021.15

33027

33027.2

33027.3

33027.4

33027.5

33027.6

33027.7

33027.8

33027.9

33027.10

33027.11

33027.12

33027.13

33027.14

33027.15

Event Records

Address

Event Cause

Reserved

EventRecord 1

EventRecord 2

EventRecord 3

EventRecord 4

EventRecord 5



MEMORY MAPS

EventRecord 1

EventRecord 2

EventRecord 3

EventRecord 4

EventRecord 5

AddressDate Format

DAY

33004

33004.0

33004.1

33004.2

33004.3

33004.4

33004.5

33004.6

33004.7

33004.8

33004.9

33004.10

33004.11

33004.12

33004.13

33004.14

33004.15

33010

33010.0

33010.1

33010.2

33010.3

33010.4

33010.5

33010.6

33010.7

33010.8

33010.9

33010.10

33010.11

33010.12

33010.13

33010.14

33010.15

33016

33016.0

33016.1

33016.2

33016.3

33016.4

33016.5

33016.6

33016.7

33016.8

33016.9

33016.10

33016.11

33016.12

33016.13

33016.14

33016.15

33022

33022.0

33022.1

33022.2

33022.3

33022.4

33022.5

33022.6

33022.7

33022.8

33022.9

33022.10

33022.11

33022.12

33022.13

33022.14

33022.15

33028

33028.0

33028.1

33028.2

33028.3

33028.4

33028.5

33028.6

33028.7

33028.8

33028.9

33028.10

33028.11

33028.12

33028.13

33028.14

33028.15

MONTH

YEAR

33006

33005

33005.0

33005.1

33005.2

33005.3

33005.4

33005.5

33005.6

33005.7

33005.8

33005.9

33005.10

33012

33011

33011.0

33011.1

33011.2

33011.3

33011.4

33011.5

33011.6

33011.7

33011.8

33011.9

33011.10

33018

33017

33018.0

33018.1

33018.2

33018.3

33018.4

33018.5

33018.6

33018.7

33018.8

33018.9

33018.10

33024

33023

33023.0

33023.1

33023.2

33023.3

33023.4

33023.5

33023.6

33023.7

33023.8

33023.9

33023.10

33030

33029

33029.0

33029.1

33029.2

33029.3

33029.4

33029.5

33029.6

33029.7

33029.8

33029.9

33029.10

MSW

LSW

TIME FORMAT

HOURS

MINUTES

Event Records



MEMORY MAPS

EventRecord 1

EventRecord 2

EventRecord 3

EventRecord 4

EventRecord 5

Event Records

MSW

LSW

RESERVED

SECONDS

33006

33005

33005.11

33005.12

33005.13

33005.14

33005.15

33006.0

33006.1

33006.2

33006.3

33006.4

33006.5

33006.6

33006.7

33006.8

33006.9

33006.10

33006.11

33006.12

33006.13

33006.14

33006.15

33012

33011

33011.11

33011.12

33011.13

33011.14

33011.15

33012.0

33012.1

33012.2

33012.3

33012.4

33012.5

33012.6

33012.7

33012.8

33012.6

33012.10

33012.11

33012.12

33012.13

33012.14

33012.15

33018

33017

33018.11

33018.12

33018.13

33018.14

33018.15

33017.0

33017.1

33017.2

33017.3

33017.4

33017.5

33017.6

33017.7

33017.8

33017.9

33017.10

33017.11

33017.12

33017.13

33017.14

33017.15

33024

33023

33023.11

33023.12

33023.13

33023.14

33023.15

33024.0

33024.1

33024.2

33024.3

33024.4

33024.5

33024.6

33024.7

33024.8

33024.9

33024.10

33024.11

33024.12

33024.13

33024.14

33024.15

33030

33029

33029.11

33029.12

33029.13

33029.14

33029.15

33030.0

33030.1

33030.2

33030.3

33030.4

33030.5

33030.6

33030.7

33030.8

33030.9

33030.10

33030.11

33030.12

33030.13

33030.14

33030.15

MILLISECONDS

Note: The memory map provided in this manual is for basic version of the Relay. Memory map may change depending on the add-on/optional functions present in the Relay. In such cases, the user is recommended to consult the manufacturer for the appropriate memory map by providing the Relay �rmware version.


MEMORY MAPS

B] Pro�bus memory map

Data which needs to be transmitted to Pro�bus master on communication needs to be selected in �parameter mapping setting� using MCOMP suite software. List of available data for con�guration in parameter mapping is discussed in cyclic data section. If number of data selected is 14 bytes then accordingly 16I/2O modules needs to be selected from all the modules available in GSD. GSD modules are discussed in Modules available in GSD �le.

Cyclic Data

Table A-4 shows all cyclic read data available through relay on Pro�bus communication to the Pro�bus master. Different parameters for respective data are also shown in the table.

Table A-4 (1): Memory Map � Pro�bus

R PhaseRMS Current

Size(Bytes)

EventRecord 5

All Cyclic read Data available to master (138 Input Byte)

Parameter

DF = 1000 (IFLC <�4 A)

DF = 100 (IFLC <�20 A)

DF = 10 (IFLC > 20 A)

UnitScaleFactor

(SF)

Range of Data

Min Max

A0.16000002

Y PhaseRMS Current

DF = 1000 (IFLC <�4 A)

DF = 100 (IFLC <�20 A)

DF = 10 (IFLC > 20 A)

A0.16000002

B PhaseRMS Current

DF = 1000 (IFLC <�4 A)

DF = 100 (IFLC <�20 A)

DF = 10 (IFLC > 20 A)

A0.16000002

Type: Vector Sum

==============

MF = 1 for IFLC <�4 A



MF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A

Type: CBCT

==============

MF = 1

Earth RMS Current mA16000002

Average RMSCurrent

A0.16000002

DF = 1000 (IFLC <�4 A)

DF = 100 (IFLC <�20 A)

DF = 10 (IFLC > 20 A)

R Phase RMSVoltage V0.16000002 DF = 10

Y Phase RMSVoltage V0.16000002 DF = 10

B Phase RMSVoltage V0.16000002 DF = 10


MEMORY MAPS

Size(Bytes)

EventRecord 5


Parameter UnitScaleFactor

(SF)

Range of Data

Min Max

Average RMSVoltage

V0.16000002 DF = 10

Frequency Hz0.1100002 DF = 10

PhaseSequence

-0.16000002Value = 0 for 1-2-3 (R-Y-B)Value = 1 for 1-3-2 (R-B-Y)

Power Factor -0.001100002 DF = 1000

Total ActivePower

W121000000004 MF = 1

Total ReactivePower

VAR121000000004 MF = 1

Total ApparentPower

VA121000000004 MF = 1

Total ActiveEnergy

Wh11.65564E+1708 MF = 1

Total ReactiveEnergy

VARh11.65564E+1708 MF = 1

Number of Start -1429496729604 MF = 1

Starting Time Sec1/501000002 DF = 50

Starting PeakCurrent

A0.16000002 DF = 10

Hours RunMinutes

51/606553502 DF = 60

Total Hours Run 1/60429496729604 DF = 60

Trip Counter -1429496729604 MF = 1

Minutes5

Trip Cause --104857504 Refer Trip Cause Table

Digital InputStatus

-02Refer Digital Input Status

Table--

Digital OutputStatus

-02Refer Digital Output Status

Table--

Truth TableOutputs

-02Refer Truth Table Output

Status Table--

Signal ConditionersOutputs

-02Refer Signal Conditioner

Output Status Table--

Counter Outputs -02Refer Counter Output Status

Table--

Timer Outputs -02Refer Timer Output Status

Table--



MEMORY MAPS

Size(Bytes)

EventRecord 5


Parameter UnitScaleFactor

(SF)

Range of Data

Min Max

Expansion ModuleTypes

-02Refer Expansion Module

Types Status Table--

Expansion Module1 status

-02

Refer Expansion DigitalI/O Status

Table

--


-02 --


-02 --

R-Y Line Voltage

Y-B Line Voltage

B-R Line Voltage

-02 V1

-02 V1

-02 V1

DF = 1

DF = 1

DF = 1

Total ApparentEnergy

5.1246E+1208

%

1 DF = 1

2000/1000002 °C/Ω0.1/1Temperature DF = 10/1

10004 1Thermal Capacity DF = 1

Number Of StopOperations

429496729604 1 DF = 1

% CurrentUnbalance

10002 1 DF = 1

-

%

Trip cause Ext 104857504 -

Motor Stop cause -04 -

-

-

Motor Inhibit cause -04 -

Status Word -02 -

-

-

Refer Trip Cause ExtTable

Refer Motor Stop CauseTable

Refer Motor Inhibit CauseTable

Refer Status wordTable

DI-DO/ Timer/Counter- Signal

Conditioner-02 - - Refer Combined word

Table

Motor Status -02Refer Motor Status

Table--



MEMORY MAPS

BitParameter Name

Output Byte 0Forward start/Start1/ Low speedstart

0.0

Function

Output Byte 0 Stop0.11 = does not stop the motor/stop is healthy/release the stop0 =stops the motor (true for both maintained and momentary mode)

In case of momentary start mode:1 = issues start command depending upon the starter type if allother conditions are healthy0 = withdraw start command and does not stop the motor

In case of maintained start mode:1 = issues start command depending upon the starter type if allother conditions are healthy0 = withdraw start command and stops the motor

Output Byte 0Reverse start/High speed start0.2

Output Byte 0Permissivecommand 1

0.31 =set permissive output 1

0 =reset permissive output 1

Output Byte 0 0.41 =set permissive output 2


Permissivecommand 2

Output Byte 0 0.51 =set permissive output 3


Permissivecommand 3

Output Byte 0 Local/remoteMode selection 1

0.6

When mode selection through communication is high then

Combination of bits 0.6 and 0.7 decides the mode selection(local 1, local 2, local 3, remote)

When mode selection through communication is low then relaywill ignore the bit status and shall not act depending on status ofthese bits for mode selection.

Output Byte 0Local/remoteMode selection 2

0.7

When bit 0.6 = 0 and bit 0.7 = 0 then mode = local 1



When bit 0.6 = 1 and bit 0.7 = 1 then mode = remote

Output Byte 1 1.01 = reset the fault/trip condition

0 = withdraws the trip reset command/no actionTrip reset

Output Byte 1 1.11 = clears thermal memory

0 = withdraw clear thermal memory command/no actionClear thermalMemory

In case of momentary start mode:1 = issues start command depending upon the starter type if allother conditions are healthy0 = withdraw start command and does not stop the motor

In case of maintained start mode:1 = issues start command depending upon the starter type if allother conditions are healthy0 = withdraw start command and stops the motor

All cyclic write data available to master (2 bytes)

Table A-5 (1): Cyclic write data


MEMORY MAPS

BitParameter Name Function

Output Byte 1 1.21 = clears number of start count

0 = withdraw command/no action

Output Byte 1 1.31 = clears number of stop count


Clear number ofstop count

Clear number ofstart count

Output Byte 1 1.41 = clears hour run


Output Byte 1 1.51 = clears total hour run


Clear totalhour run

Clear hour run

Output Byte 1 1.61 = clears energy


Output Byte 1 1.7 For future UseReserved

Clear hour run

Data Representation

Table A-6: Digital Input Status


RemarksProfibus Data Index Bit Position Digital Input Channel #

0 to 7

6,7

5

4

3

2

1

0

x

x+1

Not applicable

Not applicable

DI Channel 6

DI Channel 5

DI Channel 4

DI Channel 3

DI Channel 2

DI Channel 1

0 = Input Low

1 = Input High

Table A-5 (2): Cyclic write data


MEMORY MAPS

Table A-7: Digital Output Status


RemarksProfibus Data Index Bit Position Digital Output #

0 to 7

4 to 7

3

2

1

0

x

x+1

Not applicable

Not applicable

DO Channel 4

DO Channel 3

DO Channel 2

DO Channel 1

0 = Output Low

1 = Output High

Table A-8: Expansion Module Type Status

Expansion Module Type Status

RemarksProfibus Data Index Bit Position Description

3 to 7

2

1

0

6,7

5

4

3

2

1

0

x

x+1

Reserved

Module 3 Status

Module 2 Status

Module 1 Status

Reserved

0 = Output Low

1 = Output High

Reserved

Reserved

01 - 8 DI Module10 - 4DI 2DO Module

Module 3 Type

Module 2 Type

Module 1 Type




MEMORY MAPS

Table A-9: Expansion Digital I/O Status

Expansion Digital I/O Status

RemarksProfibus Data Index Bit Position Expansion Digital I/O Channel #

2 to 7

1

0

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

x

x+1

Reserved

DO Channel 2

DO Channel 1

DI Channel 8

DI Channel 7

DI Channel 6

DI Channel 5

DI Channel 4

DI Channel 3

DI Channel 2

DI Channel 1

Only if 4DI-2DO Module0 = Output Low1 = Output High

0 = Output Low1 = Output High

(first four DI for 4DI/2DO module)

Table A-10: Truth Table Output Status

Truth Table Output Status

RemarksProfibus Data Index Bit Position Truth Table Output #

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

x

x+1

Truth Table 16

Truth Table 15

Truth Table 14

Truth Table 13

Truth Table 12

Truth Table 11

Truth Table 10

Truth Table 9

Truth Table 8

Truth Table 7

Truth Table 6

Truth Table 5

Truth Table 4

Truth Table 3

Truth Table 2

Truth Table 1



MEMORY MAPS

Table A-11: Signal Conditioner Output Status

Signal Conditioner Output

RemarksProfibus Data Index Bit Position Signal Conditioner Output #

0 to 7

2 to 7

1

0

x

x+1

Not applicable

Not applicable




Table A-12: Timer Output Status

Timer Output Status

RemarksProfibus Data Index Bit Position Timer Output #

0 to 7

2 to 7

1

0

x

x+1

Not applicable

Not applicable

Timer 2

Timer 1


Table A-13: Output Status

Counter Output Status

RemarksProfibus Data Index Bit Position Counter Output #

0 to 7

2 to 7

1

0

x

x+1

Not applicable

Not applicable

Counter 2

Counter 1


Combined word Status

RemarksProfibus Data Index Bit Position Channel #

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

x

Digital Output 2

Digital Output 1

Digital Input 6

Digital Input 5

Digital Input 4

Digital Input 3

Digital Input 2

Digital Input 1

0 = Low1 = High

Table A-14 (1): Combined Word


MEMORY MAPS

Combined word Status

RemarksProfibus Data Index Bit Position Channel #

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

x+1

Signal Conditioner 2 output

Signal Conditioner 1 output

Counter 2 output

Counter 1 output

Timer 2 output

Timer 1 output

Digital Output 4

Digital Output 3

0 = Low1 = High

Table A-15: Motor Status

Motor Status

RemarksProfibus Data Index Bit Position Motor Status Bit #

0 to 7

7

x Reversed

1 = motor running +Iavg > 10% IFLC

0 = motor stopped ormotor running +Iavg < 10% IFLC

Reversed

Motor running_1

Two Speed status 0 = high speed1 = low speed

6

Motor Direction Status 1 = reverse direction0 = forward direction

5

Pickup Status 1 = Pickup is present0 = No pickup

4

Inhibit Status 1 = Inhibit is present0 = No Inhibit

3

Alarm Status 1 = Alarm is present0 = No alarm

2

Trip Status 1 = Motor is tripped0 = Motor is not tripped

1

Motor Status 1 = Motor is running0 = Motor is stopped

0

x+1

Table A-14 (2): Combined Word


MEMORY MAPS

Trip Cause

ProfibusData Index

Trip Cause (If Particular bit in data=1)

X

Interlock - 12

Interlock � 11

Interlock � 10

Interlock � 9

Interlock � 8

Interlock � 7

Interlock � 6

Interlock � 5

Table A-16: Trip Cause

Bit Position

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

Size(In Bytes)

0

Min Value

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Max Value

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

X+1

Interlock � 4

PTC Open Circuit

PTC Short Circuit

PTC Response Resistance

Over current

Fail to Stop

Interlock � 3

Interlock � 2

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

X+2

Interlock � 1

Successive Start


Phase Reversal

Phase Loss

Under Frequency

Over Frequency

Temperature

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

X+3

Voltage Unbalance

Under Voltage

Over Voltage

Current Unbalance

Under Current

Earth Fault

Locked Rotor

Overload

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1


MEMORY MAPS

Table A-17: Trip Cause Ext

Trip Cause Ext

Trip Cause(If Particular bit in data=1)

ProfibusData Index

x

x+1

x+2

x+1

Bit Position

0 to 7

0 to 7

0 to 7

2 to 7

1

0

Size(In Bytes)

1

1

1

1

Min Value

NA

NA

NA

NA

0

0

Max Value

NA

NA

NA

NA

1

1

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Mode Change


Inhibit Status

ProfibusData Index

x

x+1

Bit Position

0 to 7

4 to 7

3

2

1

0

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

Inhibiting parameter

Reserved

Reserved

Expansion unit failure

Stop from Communication

Interlock 12

Interlock 11

Interlock 10

Interlock 09

Interlock 08

Interlock 07

Interlock 06

Interlock 05

Interlock 04

Interlock 03

Interlock 02

Interlock 01

Digital input Stop

Maximum number of start

Thermal capacity

Trip

Under Voltage

No Voltage

Remarks

0 = No Inhibit

1 = Inhibit due to respective cause

x+20 = No Inhibit


x+30 = No Inhibit


Table A-18: Inhibit Status


MEMORY MAPS

Table A-19 (1): Stop Cause

Stop Cause

ProfibusData Index

x

x+1

Bit Position

4 to 7

3

2

1

0

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

Stopping parameter

Reserved

Expansion unit failure stop

Profibus start 2 maintained stop

Profibus start 1 maintained stop

Interlock 12

Interlock 11

Interlock 10

Interlock 09

Interlock 08

Interlock 07

Interlock 06

Interlock 05

Interlock 04

Reserved

Start 4 Maintained stop




Current Auto Stop

Voltage Auto Stop

Contactor Feedback

Interlock 3

Interlock 2

Interlock 1

Stop from communication

Digital Input Emergency Stop

Digital Input Stop

MCOMP suite Stop(HMI)

Trip

Remarks

0 = No Stop

1 = Stopped due to respective cause

x+2

x+3

0 = No Stop


0 = No Stop


0 = No Stop


7

6

5

4

User Configurable

User Configurable

User Configurable

User Configurable

x

Defined by MCOMP suite HMI

(Refer Chapter 7 Communication for

parameters that can be defined in

this status word.)


MEMORY MAPS

Status word

ProfibusData Index

x

x+1

Bit Position

3

2

1

0

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

Description

User Configurable

User Configurable

User Configurable

User Configurable

User Configurable

User Configurable

User Configurable

User Configurable

User Configurable

User Configurable

User Configurable

User Configurable

Remarks

Defined by MCOMP suite HMI

(Refer Chapter 7 Communication for

parameters that can be defined in

this status word.)

Table A-19 (2): Stop Cause


MEMORY MAPS

If there is mismatch between Number of Parameters con�gured/de�ned by MCOMP suite HMI which de�nes length of transmitted data from Relay to Pro�bus-Master and number of bytes requested by Pro�bus-Master then there are two possible cases as explained below:

a) Length of data requested by Pro�bus-Master > Con�gured Parameter�s length:

In this case Relay will append unde�ned (garbage) data after con�gured/de�ned parameter�s data. Data of con�gured parameters will not be affected.

b) Length of data requested by Pro�bus-Master < Con�gured Parameter�s length:

In this case Relay will only send data requested by Pro�bus-Master. Data frame will be clipped beyond length de�ned by master which mean no data will come after requested number of byte by Pro�bus-Master are transmitted by Relay.

Data Modules in GSD

Sr. No. DescriptionData Module Name

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

2I/2O Module

4I/2O Module

8I/2O Module

10I/2O Module

16I/2O Module

22I/2O Module

32I/2O Module

64I/2O Module

128I/2O Module

138I/2O(All Data) Module

2 Input bytes and 2 output bytes data exchange.










Note:Refer table A-2 for parameters that can be de�ned in any of the data module through MCOMP suite HMI.Refer Chapter 7: Communication, �Pro�bus Parameter mapping� section for de�ning the parameters which will be transmitted to Pro�bus master on communication network.

Data Modules available in GSD �le

There are various modules available in MCOMP Pro�bus GSD �le which can be freely selected during con�guration as per the requirement. The different modules have been de�ned with �x size and �exibility has been provided to user to con�gure the data in a sequence required as per application. By default 10 modules are available in MOCMP GSD with pre-de�ned bytes size asshown in Table A-20 and parameters for each of the modules needs to be con�gured through MCOMP suite software. Customized module size can also be made available in the GSD �le upon request without changing any MCOMP hardware/�rmware provided respective MCOMP supports that functionality.

Table A-20 : Data modules in GSD


MEMORY MAPS

Acyclic Data

Table A-20 shows acyclic read data available through Relay to the Pro�bus master on Pro�bus communication network. �Index�

Table A-21 (1): Acyclic data (in case of DPV1)

Acyclic Data

Slot Parameter name Data LengthIndex

Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI






























R Phase RMS Current

Y Phase RMS Current

B Phase RMS Current

Earth RMS Current

Average RMS Current

R Phase RMS Voltage

Y Phase RMS Voltage

B Phase RMS Voltage

Average RMS Voltage

Frequency

Power Factor

Phase Sequence

Total Active Power

Total Reactive Power

Total Apparent Power

Total Active Energy

Total Reactive Energy

Number of Start

Starting Time


Hours Run

Total Hours Run

Trip Counter

Trip Cause



Truth Tables Output

Signal Conditioners Output

Counter O/P

Timer O/P

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

4

4

4

8

8

4

2

2

2

4

4

4

2

2

2

2

2

2

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

column shown in table is de�ned through MCOMP suite HMI and is the sequence number of the de�ned/con�gured parameter.


MEMORY MAPS

Acyclic Data

Slot Parameter name Data LengthIndex



















49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59�254

255

Motor Status

External Module Type

External Module 1 Status



R-Y Line Voltage

Y-B Line Voltage

B-R Line Voltage

Total Apparent Energy

Temperature

Thermal Capacity

Number Of Stop Operations

% Current Unbalance

Trip Cause Ext

Stop Cause

Inhibit Cause

Status Word

DI/DI/Timer/SignalCond/Counter

Trip Record 1

Trip Record 2

Trip Record 3

Trip Record 4

Trip Record 5

Event Record 1

Event Record 2

Event Record 3

Event Record 4

Event Record 5

Reserved

Identification & Maintenance

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

8

2

4

4

2

4

2

2

2

2

40

40

40

40

40

16

16

16

16

16

-

68

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0


Table A-21 (2): Acyclic data (in case of DPV1)


MEMORY MAPS

C] Modbus TCP/IP Memory Map

Table A�21 shows Modbus TCP/IP memory map.

Table A-22 (1): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.

Range of dataParameter Notes

Min

LSW= Least Significant Word

MSW= Most Significant Word

1 = Trigger Start Motor CMD

1 = Trigger Stop Motor CMD

1 = Trigger Trip Reset CMD

1 = Trigger Start 2 Motor CMD

1 = Trigger Reset Thermal Memory CMD

1 = Trigger Store Factory Setting CMD

1 = Trigger Restore Factory Setting CMD

1 = Trigger Capture Starting Curve CMD

1 = Trigger MCOMP Reset CMD

1 = Trigger Clear Energy Value CMD

1 = Trigger Reset Number of Starts CMD

1 = Trigger Reset Number of Stop CMD

1 = Trigger Reset Motor Run Hrs CMD

1 = Trigger Reset Total Motor Run Hours CMD

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

ModbusAddress

Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Size inBytes

Force Single Coil (Function code - 05)

Command Address(00001 � 00010)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

00001

00002

00003

00004

00005

00006

00007

00008

00009

00010

00011

00012

00013

00014

Start Motor

Stop Motor

Trip Reset

Start 2 Motor

Reset Thermal Memory

Store Factory Setting

Restore Factory Setting

Capture Starting Curve

MCOMP Reset

Clear Energy Value

Reset Number of Starts

Reset Number of Stop

Reset Motor Run Hrs

Reset Total Motor Run Hours

Force Single Coil (Function code - 05)

Command Address (00001 � 00010)

1 = Motor Running0 = Motor StoppedMotor Status

Trip Status

Alarm Status

Inhibit Status

Pickup Status

10001

10002

10003

10004

10005

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

- - -

- - -

- - -

- - -

- - -

1 = MPR Tripped0 = MPR Not Tripped

1 = Alarm present0 = No Alarm

1 = Inhibit present0 = No Inhibit

1 = Pickup present0 = No Pickup

1 = Store Factory Settings CMD Executed0 = Store Factory Settings CMD Not ExecutedStore Factory Settings 10006 0 1 - - -

Restore Factory Settings 10007 0 1 - - -1 = Restore Factory Settings CMD Executed

0 = Restore Factory Settings CMD Not Executed


MEMORY MAPS


Min

ModbusAddress

Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Size inBytes

Capture Starting Curve

Thermal Memory

RTC Write

10008

10009

10010

0

0

0

1

1

1

- - -

- - -

- - -

1 = Capture Starting Curve CMD Executed0 = Capture Starting Curve CMD Not Executed

1 = Thermal Memory CMD Executed0 = Thermal Memory CMD not Executed

1 = RTC Write CMD Executed0 = RTC Write CMD Not Executed

Calibration

EEPROM File System

10011

10012

0

0

1

1

- - -

- - -

1 = MPR is Calibrated0 = MPR is not Calibrated

1 = EEPROM File System is working0 = EEPROM File System is not working

I2C RTC Fail 10013 0 1 - - -1 = I2C RTC Fail

0 = I2C RTC Working

I2C EEPROM FAIL

RDOL Direction Status

10014

10015

0

0

1

1

- - -

- - -

1 = I2C EEPROM Fail0 = I2C EEPROM Working

1 = Reverse0 = Forward

Reserved 10016 0 1 - - - -

RDOL Direction Status 10017 0 1 - - -1 = No Voltage Inhibit Occurred (Voltage ConnectEnable but Applied Voltage is less than 10 % Vn)

0 = No voltage inhibit not occurred

Under-voltage AlarmInhibit Status

10018 0 1 - - -

1 = Under-voltage alarm inhibit occurred (VoltageConnect Enable but Applied Voltage is less than

Under voltage Alarm Set Value & Above 10 % Vn)0 = Under-voltage alarm inhibit not occurred

Trip Inhibit Status 10019 0 1 - - -1 = Motor is in Trip condition &

not Reset; 0 otherwise

Thermal MemoryInhibit Status

10020 0 1 - - -1 = Thermal memory Inhibit status occurred

(Thermal Memory > 30%)0 = Thermal memory Inhibit status not Occurred

Max Number StartInhibit Status

10021 0 1 - - -

1 = Max no. of start inhibit occurred (MaxNumber of Starts exceeds Permissive Starts &

Inhibit Period is not finish)0 = Max no. of start inhibit not occurred

Digital I/P StopInhibit Status

10022 0 1 - - -

1 = Digital I/P Stop Inhibit Status occurred (Oneof DI configure as STOP input & Valid STOP

input is not applied)0 = Digital I/P Stop Inhibit Status not occurred

Interlock 1 InhibitStatus

10023 0 1 - - -1 = Interlock 1 Inhibit occurred (Interlock 1

configured as STOP input is absent)0 = Interlock 1 Inhibit not occurred

1 = Interlock 2 Inhibit occurred (Interlock 1configured as STOP input is absent)0 = Interlock 2 Inhibit not occurred


10024 0 1 - - -



MEMORY MAPS


Min

ModbusAddress

Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Size inBytes

Read Input Registers (Function Code - 04)

The metering data, trip & event record data addresses are same as mentioned in Modbus RTU map.

Ethernet Module Software Version (33151 - 33152)

ETHERNET SW VERSION

-Minor 33151 0 65535 - - 2

-Major 33152 0 65535 - - 2

Read/Write Register (Function Code - 03)

Protection Settings Address (40041 - 40137)

Overload Protection

-Overload pick up 40041 200 1000 10 % 2

-Overload pick up 40042

Pickup SetValue -(PickupSet Value*CurrentBand/1000)

10 % 2

-Alarm pick up 40043 800 1000 10 % 2

-Alarm reset 40044

Pickup SetValue -(PickupSet Value*CurrentBand/1000)

10 % 2

Thermal MemoryReset Value

10045 5 30 1 2 -%

-Thermal Inhibit Set 40046 30 95 - % 2

Pause Time DelaySetting

10047 50 60000 50 2 -Sec

1 = Interlock 3 Inhibit occurred (Interlock 1configured as STOP input is absent)0 = Interlock 3 Inhibit not occurred


10025 0 1 - - -


Bit 0: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable







Thermal memory (TM)ON/OFF:1 (Bit 0)Alarm (AL) ON/OFF:1(Bit 1)Pause Settings (PS)ON OFF:1 (Bit 2)Reserved: (bit 3 to bit 7)Modes of Reset (MRL):Local/Manual:1 (Bit 8)Modes of Reset (MRR):Remote: 1(Bit 9)

40048

TM = 0AL = 0PS = 0

MRL = 0MRR = 0MRC = 0MRA = 0

- - 2

TM = 1AL = 1PS = 1



MEMORY MAPS


Min

ModbusAddress

Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Size inBytes

Modes of Reset (MRC):Communication/Serial:1(Bit 10)Modes of Reset (MRA):Auto:1(Bit 11)

Locked Rotor Protection

-Locked Rotor pick up 40049 1500 10000 10 % 2

-Locked Rotor pick

up reset 40050

Pickup Set Value -(Pickup Set Value*Current HysteresisBand/1000)

10 % 2

-Locked Rotor Alarm Set 40051 900 900 10 % 2

-Locked Rotor Alarm

Reset 40052


10 % 2

-Locked Rotor Trip Delay 40053 25 1500 50 Sec 2







Mode: Alarm (AL): 1(Bit 0)Mode: Trip (TR):1(Bit 1)Reserved:(Bit 2 to Bit 7)Modes of Reset:Local (MRL): 1 (Bit 8)Modes of Reset:Remote (MRR): 1 (Bit 9)Modes of Reset:Communication/Serial(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)Modes of Reset: Auto(MRA): 1(Bit 11)

40054

AL = 0TR = 0


- - 2

AL = 1TR = 1


Under Voltage Protection

-Under Voltage pick up 40055 20 850 10 % 2

-Under Voltage pick

up reset 40056


10 % 2

-Under Voltage Alarm Set 40057 1100 1100 10 % 2



MEMORY MAPS

-Under Voltage Alarm

Reset 40058

Pickup Set Value -(Pickup Set Value *Current HysteresisBand/1000)

10 % 2

-Under Voltage Trip Delay 40059 10 1250 50 Sec 2

Bit 0: 0 = Disable;

1 = Enable

Bit 1: 0 = Disable;

1 = Enable

Bit 8: 0 = Disable;

1 = Enable

Bit 9: 0 = Disable;

1 = Enable

Bit 10: 0 = Disable;

1 = Enable


1 = Enable

Mode: Alarm (AL): 1

(Bit 0)

Mode: Trip (TR):1

(Bit 1)

Reserved:(Bit 2 to Bit 7)

Modes of Reset:

Local (MRL): 1 (Bit 8)

Modes of Reset:

Remote (MRR): 1 (Bit 9)

Modes of Reset:

Communication/Serial

(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)

Modes of Reset: Auto

(MRA): 1

(Bit 11)

40060

AL = 0

TR = 0

MRL = 0

MRR = 0

MRC = 0

MRA = 0

- - 2

AL = 1

TR = 1

MRL = 1

MRR = 1

MRC = 1

MRA = 1

Current Unbalance Protection

-Current Unbalance pick up 40061 50 1000 10 % 2

-Under Voltage pick

up reset 40062


10 % 2

-Under Voltage Alarm Set 40063 850 1000 10 % 2

-Under Voltage Alarm

Reset 40064


10 % 2

-Under Voltage Trip Delay 40065 50 1500 50 Sec 2


Min

ModbusAddress

Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Size inBytes






Mode: Alarm (AL): 1(Bit 0)Mode: Trip (TR):1(Bit 1)Reserved:(Bit 2 to Bit 7)Modes of Reset:Local (MRL): 1 (Bit 8)

40066

AL = 0TR = 0


- - 2

AL = 1TR = 1



MEMORY MAPS



Modes of Reset:Remote (MRR): 1 (Bit 9)Modes of Reset:Communication/Serial(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)Modes of Reset: Auto(MRA): 1(Bit 11)


Min

ModbusAddress

Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Size inBytes

Temperature Protection

-

RTD Temperature pick up40067

250 1800 10 ºC2

PTC Response resistance 2700 4000 1 Ω

RTD Pickup Set value

-

RTD Temperature Pickup Reset 40068

RTD Pickup set � 5 10 ºC2

PTC Reset Resistance 1600 2500 1 Ω

-

RTD TemperatureAlarm Set

40069 RTD Pickup set � 20 10 ºC 2 -

RTD TemperatureAlarm Reset

40070 RTD Pickup set � 25 10 ºC 2 -

-

RTD TemperatureTrip Delay 40071 50 Sec 2

PTC Trip delay 5 3000

-250 12500



Bit 2: 0 = RTD;1 = PTC





40072


- - 2



Under current Protection

-Under current pick up 40073 300 850 10 % 2

-Under current pick

up reset 40074

Pickup Set Value -(Pickup Set Value*Current Band/1000)

10 % 2

Mode: Alarm (AL):1(Bit 0)Mode: Trip (TR):1(Bit 1)Temperature SensorType (SEN): (Bit 2)Reserved: (Bit 3 to Bit 7)Modes of Reset:Local (MRL): 1 (Bit 8)Modes of Reset:Remote (MRR): 1 (Bit 9)Modes of Reset:Communication/Serial(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)Modes of Reset:Auto (MRA): 1 (Bit 11)


MEMORY MAPS

-Under current Alarm Set 40075 1100 1100 10 % 2

-Under current Alarm

Reset 40076

Pickup Set Value -(Pickup Set Value *Current Band/1000)

10 % 2

-Under current Trip Delay 40077 50 6000 50 Sec 2








40078

AL = 0TR = 0


- - 2

AL = 1TR = 1



Min

ModbusAddress

Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Size inBytes

Earth Fault Protection

0 = Vector Sum1 = CBCT

If user SelectVector Sum

Pickup Set Range =25 to 500% of IFLC

CBCTPickup Set Range =

0.1 to 20 ADefault = 0.1 A

- - 240079E/F Type 0 1

-E/F pick up 40080

10 %orA

21 �200

-200 5000

10

E/F pick up Reset 40081 210 -%


E/F Alarm pick up 40082 10 % 21 �200

-900 900

E/F Alarm Reset 40083 210 -%




MEMORY MAPS

Trip Delay/Trip Delay(RUN)

40084 Sec 20 3000

-0 3000


Min

ModbusAddress

Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Size inBytes

50

50

Trip Delay (Start) 40085 0 1250 50 Sec 2

Alarm Delay (Start) 40086 0 3000 50 Sec 2

Alarm Delay (Run) 40087 0 3000 50 Sec 2

This delay is applicable if userselect E/F Type as CBCT

Bit 0: 0 = Disable;

1 = Enable

Bit 1: 0 = Disable;

1 = Enable

Bit 8: 0 = Disable;

1 = Enable

Bit 9: 0 = Disable;

1 = Enable


1 = Enable


1 = Enable

Mode: Alarm (AL): 1

(Bit 0)

Mode: Trip (TR):1

(Bit 1)

Reserved:(Bit 2 to Bit 7)

Modes of Reset:

Local (MRL): 1 (Bit 8)

Modes of Reset:

Remote (MRR): 1 (Bit 9)

Modes of Reset:

Communication/Serial

(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)

Modes of Reset: Auto

(MRA): 1

(Bit 11)

40088

AL = 0

TR = 0

MRL = 0

MRR = 0

MRC = 0

MRA = 0

- - 2

AL = 1

TR = 1

MRL = 1

MRR = 1

MRC = 1

MRA = 1


Voltage Unbalance Protection

Voltage Unbalancepick up

40089 500 10 % 2 -50

Voltage Unbalancepick up reset 40090 210 -%


Voltage UnbalanceAlarm Set

40091 900 10 % 2 -900

Voltage UnbalanceAlarm Reset

40092

210 -%


Voltage UnbalanceTrip Delay

40093

1000 50 Sec 2 -10


MEMORY MAPS


Min

ModbusAddress

Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Size inBytes








40094

AL = 0TR = 0


- - 2

AL = 1TR = 1


Over Voltage Protection

Over Voltagepick up

40095 1300 10 % 2 -1010

Over Voltage pickup reset 40096 210 -%


Over VoltageAlarm Set

40097 950 10 % 2 -950

Over VoltageAlarm Reset

40098 210 -%


Over VoltageTrip Delay

40099 1250 50 Sec 2 -10








40100

AL = 0TR = 0


- - 2

AL = 1TR = 1




MEMORY MAPS


Min

ModbusAddress

Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Size inBytes

Under Frequency Protection

Under Frequencypick up

40101 980 10 % 2 -940

Under Frequency pickup reset 40102 210 -%


Under FrequencyAlarm Set

40103 1010 10 % 2 -1010

Under FrequencyAlarm Reset

40104 210 -%


Under FrequencyTrip Delay

40105 1500 50 Sec 2 -50








40106

AL = 0TR = 0


- - 2

AL = 1TR = 1


Over Frequency Protection

Over Frequencypick up

40107 1050 10 % 2 -1010

Over Frequencypick up reset 40108 210 -%


Over FrequencyAlarm Set

40109 990 10 % 2 -990

Over FrequencyAlarm Reset

40110 210 -%




MEMORY MAPS


Min

ModbusAddress

Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Size inBytes








40112

AL = 0TR = 0


- - 2

AL = 1TR = 1



Bit 1: 0 = 1-2-3 (R YB); 1 = 1-3-2 (R B Y)Bit 8: 0 = Disable;

1 = EnableBit 9: 0 = Disable;



1 = Enable

Mode (PR) Enable/Disable: 1 (Bit 0)Phase Sequence (PS)setting: 1 (Bit 1)Reserved: (Bit 2 toBit 7)Modes of Reset(MRL): Local: 1 (Bit 8)Modes of Reset(MRR): Remote: 1(Bit 9)Modes of Reset(MRC):Communication/Serial: 1 (Bit 10)Modes of Reset(MRA): Auto:1(Bit 11)

40113

AL = 0TR = 0


- - 2

AL = 1TR = 1


Phase Loss Protection

Phase Loss Trip Delay 40114 1500 50 Sec 2 -5







Trip Delay (TD)Enable/Disable: 1(Bit 0)Reserved: (Bit 1 toBit 7)Modes of Reset(MRL): Local: 1 (Bit 8)Modes of Reset (MRR):Remote: 1 (Bit 9)Modes of Reset (MRC):Communication/ Serial:1 (Bit 10)Modes of Reset(MRA): Auto:1 (Bit 11)

40115

TD = 0MRL = 0MRR = 0MRC = 0MRA = 0

- - 2


Over FrequencyTrip Delay

40111 1500 50 Sec 2 -50



MEMORY MAPS


Min

ModbusAddress

Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Size inBytes

Re Acceleration

Voltage Dip 40116 950 10 % 2 -200

VoltageRestoration

40117 950 10 % 2 -650

Re Accelerationrestart time

40118 3000 50 Sec 2 -10

Re Accelerationrestart delay 40119 60000 50 Sec 2 -200

Re AccelerationEnable/Disable: 1

(Bit 0)Aux & Motor Supply:

1 (Bit 1)

Bit 0: 0 = Disable1 = Enable

Bit 1:0 = Same;

1 = Separate

40120 0 1 2--

Max number of Start Protection

Reference period 40121 180000 3000 Min 4 -45000

Permissive starts 40122 30 1 - 2 -1

Inhibit period 40123 360000 3000 Min 4 -3000






Max Start (SS)Enable/Disable: 1(Bit 0)Reserved: (Bit 1 toBit 7)Modes of Reset(MRL): Local: 1 (Bit 8)Modes of Reset(MRR): Remote: 1(Bit 9)Modes of Reset(MRC):Communication/Serial:1 (Bit 10)Modes of Reset(MRA):Auto:1 (Bit 11)

40126

SS = 0MRL = 0MRR = 0MRC = 0MRA = 0

- - 2

SS = 1MRL = 1MRR = 1MRC = 1MRA = 1






Excessive Start TimeProtection (ESTP)Enable/Disable: 1(Bit 0)Modes of Reset(MRL): Local: 1 (Bit 8)Modes of Reset(MRR): Remote: 1

40128


- - 2




MEMORY MAPS


Min

ModbusAddress

Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Size inBytes




(Bit 9)Modes of Reset(MRC):Communication/Serial:1 (Bit 10)Modes of Reset(MRA): Auto: 1(Bit 11)

Hysteresis Band settings

Current 40129 150 10 % 2 -30

Voltage 40130 150 10 % 2 -30

Frequency 40131 150 10 % 2 -30

Under current Protection

Over current pick up 40132 10000 10 % 2 -500

Over current pickup reset

40133 210 -%

Pickup Set Value -(Pickup Set Value*Current Band/1000)

Over currentAlarm Set

40134 900 10 % 2 -900

Over currentAlarm Reset

40135 210 -%


Over currentTrip Delay

40136 500 50 Sec 2 -5







Mode: Alarm (AL): 1(Bit 0)Mode: Trip (TR):1(Bit 1)Reserved:(Bit 2 to Bit 7)Modes of Reset:Local (MRL): 1 (Bit 8)Modes of Reset:Remote (MRR): 1 (Bit 9)Modes of Reset:Communication/Serial(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)Modes of Reset:Auto (MRA): 1(Bit 11)

40137

AL = 0TR = 0


- - 2

AL = 1TR = 1




MEMORY MAPS


Min

ModbusAddress

Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Size inBytes

System Settings Address (40151 - 40177)

Motor Settings

Full Load Current 40151 8000 10 A 2 -6

Motor Voltage 40152 480 1 V 2 Setting must be 380 or 415 or 480380

Auxiliary Supply 40153 230 1 V 2 -24

Voltage connect 40154 1 1 - 2 0=Disable / 1=Enable0

5 = Class 510 = Class 1015 = Class 1520 = Class 2025 = Class 2530 = Class 30

40155 405 1 - 2Trip Class

Starting Time 40156 10000 50 Sec 2 -50

Frequency selection 40157 600 10 Hz 2 50 Hz or 60 Hz500

Running Current 40158 100 1 % 2 -20

System type 40159 1 1 - 20 = 3 Phase � 4 Wire1 = 3 Phase � 3 Wire

0

MCOMP Software

Software version 40163 9999 100 - 2 -0

Type of starter 40164 4 1 - 20-DOL

1-RDOL2-Star Delta

0

Time in Star 40165 1500 50 Sec 2Max value of Time in star =(Starting time -1) seconds

50

Chang Over Delay 40166 10000 50 Sec 2 -5

Bit Field - Description----------------------0 - Local1 - Remote2 - Communication When LOCAL Selected-------------------------5 - Local Only6 - Remote OnlyWhen REMOTE Selected-----------------------------Remote Start1 (In case of RDOL showStart1 & Start2)7 - Local Only8 - Remote OnlyRemote Start2 (In case of RDOL show Start3 & Start4)

Mode- Display/Local/Remote/Comm

40167 0 1 - 24095


Motor Tag

Characters allowed are A-Z, a-z, 0-9and Special chars: #, - , _ , . , ' & space(Hex values will be shown at registeraddress).For e.g. if Motor Tag is 1234567890then Address 40173 will show 3231,40174 = 3433, 40175 = 3635,40176 = 3837 & 40177 = 3039User can select maximum of 10Characters Motor tag number.If Motor Tag is of less than 10 chars,special char �space� (Hex 20) will beadded for remaining characters.

Max 10 Ascii Charwide Motor Tag

40173 - - - 2-

40174 - - - 2-

40175 - - - 2-

40176 - - - 2-

40177 - - - 2-


MEMORY MAPS


Min

ModbusAddress

Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Size inBytes

9 - Local Only10 - Remote Only When COMMUNICATION Selected---------------------------------11 - Local Only12 - Remote Only

Ratio 40168 10000 10 - 2 -1

Primary Current 40169 10000 1 - 2 -1

Secondary Current 40170 5 1 - 2 Setting must be 1 or 51

Mode 40171 1 1 - 2 0=Disable / 1=Enable0

External CT settings

Bit 0 - 0 = Disable/

1 = Enable


1 = Enable


1 = Enable


1 = Enable


1 = Enable


1 = Enable

EventPickup (EP): 1

(Bit 0)

EventTrip (ET): 1

(Bit 1)

EventAlarm (EA): 1

(Bit 2)

Reserved: 5

Auto Start Detect

(AS): 1 (Bit 8)

Voltage Auto Stop

(VAS): 1 (Bit 9)

Current Auto Stop

(CAS): 1 (Bit 10)

Reserved1: 5

40172

ES = 0

ET = 0

EA = 0

AS = 0

VAS = 0

CAS = 0

- - 2

ES = 1

ET = 1

EA = 1

AS = 1

VAS = 1

CAS = 1



MEMORY MAPS


Min

ModbusAddress

Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Size inBytes

Communication Settings Address (40191 - 40213)

Modbus

40191 1 - - 22

40192 1 - - 2247

40193 0 - - 21

40194 0 - - 22

40195 0 - - 21

Mode

Node Address

Baud Rate

Parity

Stop Bits

1 = RTU

1 to 247

0 = 96001 =19200

0 = No parity1 = Even Parity2 = Odd Parity

0 = 1 Stop bit1 = 2 Stop bits

40196 0 - - 22

40197 1 - - 2126

Mode

Node Address

0 = MODBUS1 = Profibus2 = Ethernet

Manual Address 01 - 125Auto Address = 126

Modbus

Ethernet

40203 0 - - 21Mode: DHCP: 1(Bit 0)

Time Zone Sign: 1(Bit 1)Reserved: (Bit 2 to Bit 15)

Bit 0 0 -Disable / 1 - Enable

Bit 1 0 = '-' / 1 = '1�

40204 0 - - 44294967

296IP Address

40206 0 - - 4Subnet Mask

40208 0 - - 4Default Gateway

40210 0 - - 4SNTP Server Address

e.g if Address is192(0xCO).168(0x78).120(0xA8).

105(0x69)then value will be

0x69A878C0 = 1772648640

4294967296

4294967296

4294967296

40212 0 - - 4

Time Zone GMTHour: 8 (Bit 0-7)

Time Zone GMT Min:8 (Bit 8-15)

Reserved: (Bit 16to bit 31)

Hrs = 0 to 13Min = 0 to 59

4294967296



MEMORY MAPS


Min

ModbusAddress

Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Size inBytes

DIO Settings Address (40231 - 40282)

Input 1

Bit 0 - ResetBit 1- Start 1Bit 2 - Start 2Bit 3 - Stop

Bit 4 - Local/Remote(0 - Local and 1 - Remote)

Bit 5 - Interlock 1Bit 6 - Interlock 2Bit 7 - Interlock 3

Bit 8 - ESTOPBit 9 -Contactor Feedback

Bit 10 - Start 3Bit 11 - Start 4

Bit 12 - TestBit 13 - None========1 - Enable0 - Disable

Mode- Display/Local/Remote/

Comm40231 1 1 - 28192

40232 5 50 Sec 23000Validation Period -

0 = Disable1 = Alarm

2 = Trip and Trip Delay3 = Interlock 14 = Interlock 25 = Interlock 36 = Local Reset

7 = Communication Reset8 = Auto Reset

9 = Remote Reset10 = STOP

Interlock Config 40233 1 1 - 21024

Bit 0 - 7 Note: Thisshould be updated ifuser selects interlock

type as tripBit 8/9/10/11 - 0 =Disable/1 = Enable

Note: This should beupdated if user

selects interlock typeas trip

Bit 12/13 - 0 =Disable/1 = Enable

Interlock Trip Delay(ITD) (Bit 0 -7)

Modes of Reset:Local/Manual (MRL)

(Bit - 8)Modes of Reset:Remote (MRR)

(Bit - 9)Modes of Reset:Communication/

Serial (MRC)(Bit - 10)

40234

ITD = 1MRL = 0MRR = 0MRC = 0MRA = 0

TI = 0MM = 0


TI = 1MM = 1

ITDin

Sec2


TI = 1MM = 1



MEMORY MAPS


Min

ModbusAddress

Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Size inBytes

Input 2







Type of Input 40235 1 1 - 28192



selects interlock typeas STOP otherwise

must be Load DefaultValue 0

Modes of Reset:Auto (MRA) (Bit - 11)

Test Input (TI)(Bit - 12)

Maintained Mode(MM) (Bit - 13)











(Bit - 9)

40238


TI = 0MM = 0


TI = 1MM = 1

ITDin

Sec2


TI = 1MM = 1



MEMORY MAPS


Min

ModbusAddress

Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Size inBytes







Modes of Reset:Communication/





Input 3







Type of Input 40239 1 1 - 28192









MEMORY MAPS


Min

ModbusAddress

Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Size inBytes

















40242


TI = 0MM = 0


TI = 1MM = 1

ITDin

Sec2


TI = 1MM = 1

Input 4







Type of Input 40243 1 1 - 28192









MEMORY MAPS


Min

ModbusAddress

Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Size inBytes

















40246


TI = 0MM = 0


TI = 1MM = 1

ITDin

Sec2


TI = 1MM = 1

Input 5







Type of Input 40247 1 1 - 28192









MEMORY MAPS


Min

ModbusAddress

Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Size inBytes

















40250


TI = 0MM = 0


TI = 1MM = 1

ITDin

Sec2


TI = 1MM = 1

Input 6







Type of Input 40251 1 1 - 28192









MEMORY MAPS


Min

ModbusAddress

Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Size inBytes

















40254


TI = 0MM = 0


TI = 1MM = 1

ITDin

Sec2


TI = 1MM = 1

Output 1

Bit 0 - AlarmBit 1 - Interlock 1Bit 2 - Interlock 2Bit 3 - Interlock 3Bit 4 - Follow 1Bit 5 - Follow 2

Bit 6 - RUNBit 7 - RDOL-Forward RelayBit 8 - RDOL-Reverse Relay

Bit 9 - StarBit 10 - DeltaBit 11 - Trip

Bit 12 - MainBit 13 - Drive Available

=====1 - Enable/0 - Disable

Type of Output 40255 1 1 - 416384

40257 0 1 - 21Mode (Level/Pulse) 0 = Level /1 =Pulse

40258 5 50 Sec 250000Hold Time Only used if mode is pulse

40259 5 50 Sec 250000Time Delay for Follow Relay -

Output 2


Bit 6 - RUN

Type of Output 40260 1 1 - 416384



MEMORY MAPS


Min

ModbusAddress

Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Size inBytes




Output 3


Bit 6 - RUNBit 7 - RDOL-Forward RelayBit 8 - RDOL-Reverse Relay




Type of Output 40265 1 1 - 416384




Bit 7 - RDOL-Forward RelayBit 8 - RDOL-Reverse Relay




Output 4

Bit 0 - AlarmBit 1 - Interlock 1Bit 2 - Interlock 2Bit 3 - Interlock 3Bit 4 - Follow 1

Type of Output 40270 1 1 - 416384



MEMORY MAPS


Min

ModbusAddress

Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Size inBytes




Analog Output

0 - Ir1 - Iy2 - Ib

3 - Iavg4 - Vr5 - Vy6 - Vb

7 - Vavg8 - Vry9 - Vyb10 - Vbr

11 - Apparent Power12 - Reactive Power13 - Active Power14 - Temperature15 - Frequency

Type of Input 40275 0 1 - 215

Current (Ir, Iy, Ib, Iavg)= 0Voltage (Vr,Vy,Vb,Vavg,

Vry, Vyb, Vbr) = 0Power (Apparent,

Reactive, Active) = 0Temperature = 0Frequency = 0

Min 40276 0 1 - 4<MinValue

Bit 5 - Follow 2Bit 6 - RUN

Bit 7 - RDOL-Forward RelayBit 8 - RDOL-Reverse Relay




Current (Ir, Iy,Ib, Iavg) = 3600Voltage (Vr,Vy,Vb,Vavg) = 375

Line Voltage (Vry, Vyb,Vbr) = 650Power (Apparent,

Reactive, Active) =28.3Temperature = 200

Frequency = 75

Max 40278 10 - 4>MinValue

3600



MEMORY MAPS


Min

ModbusAddress

Max

ScaleFactor

(SF)Unit

Size inBytes

40280 0 1 - 21Scale Factor0 = Factory Set

1 = Manual

40281 4 10 mA 220Expected Output -

40282 1 10 mA 224Actual Output -

Real Time Clock Data Address (40501 - 40506)

40501 0 - Sec 259Sec -

40502 0 - Min 259Min -

40503 0 - - 223Hours -

40504 1 - - 231Date -

40505 1 - - 212Month -

40506 0 - - 299Year -




ANNEXURE B - APPLICATION NOTES

Overview

The Relay supports three communication protocols as Modbus serial, Pro�bus DP and Modbus over TCP/IP. The memory map for all these communication protocols is described below.

A] Modbus RTU Memory Map

DOL Starter

This is the simplest and widely used type of starter. The selection of a DOL starter is based on the rating of the motor.

Basic settings required in the Relay for DOL starter:

� Starter type to be selected as DOL.

� One Digital Input to be selected as START1.

� One Digital Output to be selected as RUN.

Figure B�1 shows the DOL starter wiring diagram. The connections in the diagram are shown considering 3P-4W system. The connection may be different for different type of system selection.

When the Relay receives START1 input, RUN output picks up after validating all the start inhibit conditions (Refer Inhibit Status in chapter Testing and Troubleshooting). When the RUN output is activated, the contactor picks up, which starts the Motor. When a STOP command is received by the Relay, RUN output drops out, contactor drops out and the motor stops.

Figure B-1: DOL Starter Wiring Diagram

61 Dl1

62 Dl2

63 Dl3

64 Dl4

65 Dl5

66 Dl6

67 COM

DIG

ITA

L IN

PUTS

3 4

Y R

3-PH.VOLTAGE

1 2

N B

71

N/-

72

L/+

AUX.VOLT

DIG

ITA

L O

UTP

UT

CO

NTA

CTS 82

8381858684888987919290

RTD/PTC

Tl1 Tl2

ANALOG O/P

AO1 AO2 D+ D-

RS485

PWR/COMM

MOTOR STATUS

ALARM/PICKUP

TRIPRST ENT

Mini USB PortLN



RTD/PTC

CONTACTOR COIL

TRIP INDICATION

L/+

N/-

RYBN

FUSE

START

STOP

RESET

CM UNIT

R Y B

CBCTCM UNIT

R Y BS2

S1

M

SFU / MCCB

CONTACTOR1 3 5

2 4 6


APPLICATION NOTES

RDOL Starter

This type of starter is used when the motor is required to run in both forward as well as reverse directions depending upon the application.

Basic settings required in the Relay for RDOL starter:

� Starter type to be selected as RDOL.



� One Digital Output to be selected as FORWARD RELAY.

� One Digital Output to be selected as REVERSE RELAY.

Figure B-2 shows the RDOL starter wiring diagram. The connections in the diagram are shown considering 3P-4W system. The connection may be different for different type of system selection.

When the Relay receives START1(forward start) input, FORWARD RELAY output picks up after validating all the start inhibit conditions. When the FORWARD RELAY output is activated, the contactor A picks up starting the Motor in forward direction. When the Relay receives START2(reverse start) input, REVERSE RELAY output picks up after validating all the start inhibit conditions. When the REVERSE RELAY output is activated, the contactor B picks up starting the Motor in reverse direction. When a STOP command is received by the Relay, FORWARD RELAY/REVERSE RELAY output drops out, corresponding contactor drops out and the motor stops.

When motor is running in forward direction and Relay receives START2 input, it will ignore the command and will continue to run in forward direction. When motor is running in reverse direction and Relay receives START1 input, it will ignore the command and will continue to run in reverse direction.

Figure B-2: RDOL Starter Wiring Diagram

61 Dl1

62 Dl2

63 Dl3

64 Dl4

65 Dl5

66 Dl6

67 COM

DIG

ITA

L IN

PUTS

3 4

Y R

3-PH.VOLTAGE

1 2

N B

71

N/-

72

L/+

AUX.VOLT

DIG

ITA

L O

UTP

UT

CO

NTA

CTS 82

8381858684888987919290

RTD/PTC

Tl1 Tl2

ANALOG O/P

AO1 AO2 D+ D-

RS485

PWR/COMM

MOTOR STATUS

ALARM/PICKUP

TRIPRST ENT

Mini USB PortLN



RTD/PTC

CONTACTOR COIL

TRIP INDICATION

L/+

N/-

RYBN

FUSE

START1

STOP

RESET

START2CONTACTOR B

1 13 3 55

2 24 4 66

CM UNIT

R Y B

CBCTCM UNIT

R Y BS2

S1

M

SFU / MCCB

CONTACTOR A


APPLICATION NOTES

STAR/DELTA Starter

This type of starter provides two types of connections, Star and Delta. During starting time, the star connection reduces the high starting current and then automatically switches to delta after set time in star setting.

Basic settings required in the Relay for STAR-DELTA starter:

� Starter type to be selected as STAR-DELTA.

� Time in Star setting to be set as per requirement.

� Star-Delta change over delay setting to be set as per requirement.


� One Digital Output to be selected as MAIN.

� One Digital Output to be selected as STAR.

� One Digital Output to be selected as DELTA.

Figure B-3 shows the Star-delta wiring diagram. The connections in the diagram are shown considering 3P-4W system. The connection may be different for different type of system selection.

When the Relay receives START1 input, MAIN and STAR output picks up after validating all the start inhibit conditions. Also the 'time in star' timer starts. When the MAIN and STAR output is activated, the contactor A and contactor C picks up starting the Motor in reduced voltage condition. The 'time in star' timer expires and STAR output drops out, dropping contactor C. The DELTA output picks up after the set 'change over delay' timer expires. When the DELTA output is activated, the contactor B picks up and motor comes in running condition. When a STOP command is received by the Relay, MAIN and DELTA outputs drop out, corresponding contactors drop out and the motor stops.

The MAIN output remains in pick up condition during change over between STAR to DELTA.

Figure B-3: STAR/DELTA Starter Wiring Diagram

FUSE

61 Dl1

62 Dl2

63 Dl3

64 Dl4

65 Dl5

66 Dl6

67 COM

DIG

ITA

L IN

PUTS

3 4

Y R

3-PH.VOLTAGE

1 2

N B

71

N/-

72

L/+

AUX.VOLT

DIG

ITA

L O

UTP

UT

CO

NTA

CTS 82

8381858684888987919290

RTD/PTC

Tl1 Tl2

ANALOG O/P

AO1 AO2 D+ D-

RS485

PWR/COMM

MOTOR STATUS

ALARM/PICKUP

TRIPRST ENT

Mini USB PortLN

CONTACTOR A COIL (MAIN)

CONTACTOR C COIL (DELTA)

L/+

N/-

CONTACTOR B COIL (STAR)



RTD/PTC

CM UNIT

R Y B

CBCTCM UNIT

S2

S1

START

STOP

RESET

RYBN

FUSE

SFU / MCCB

R1 Y1 B1

M

1 3 5

R2 Y2 B2

1 3 5 1 3 5

2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6

CONTACTOR A CONTACTOR BCONTACTOR C


APPLICATION NOTES

B] Non Motor Load Application

The MCOMP relay is suitable for non-motor load application as well. The application can be of heater feeder or MCCB feeder used in case of lighting load etc.

For such applications, one should correctly set the �Feeder type� in System setting as �Non-Motor�.

Certain protections and related functions (alarm, trip, inhibit) are not available in case of Non-Motor application which are as follows:

1. Thermal Overload

2. Locked Rotor

3. Current Unbalance

4. Phase Loss

5. Phase Reversal

6. Under Current

7. Maximum number of starts

8. Excessive Start Time

9. All voltage based protections and functions

Whenever there is an attempt to change in this �Feeder type� setting (in case of drive is running or not running), the relay and display unit needs to be power recycled for successful intended operation.

C] Re-acceleration Application

Re-acceleration is a method where the Relay restarts the motor automatically without user intervention for momentary voltage dips. The re-acceleration or motor restart function plays very important role in industries where the critical motor needs to be restarted immediately (or with some delay) without manual intervention in case of process interruption due to under-

voltage/no voltage condition.

Conventionally two aux contacts, 1ON delay and 1 OFF delay timer per feeder is required to implement the reacceleration scheme which causes the increase in module size, increase in cost and reduction in reliability as the number of dependent component increases.

The MCOMP relay provides the re-acceleration function as an inbuilt feature with no need of any additional aux contacts and external timer.

The two cases in Re-acceleration supported by MCOMP are as follows:

1. Motor Re-acceleration function:

Voltage restores within 200 ms from the last voltage dip or no-voltage condition: If there is a sudden voltage dip in the power source for a duration of less than 200 ms then the motor should continue to run without any interruption. The output contact of the Relay holds the contacts for 200 ms. The motor will continue to run when voltage restores within 200 ms from the last voltage dip or no-voltage condition.

2. Motor Re-start function:

Voltage restores after 200 ms from last voltage dip or no-voltage condition: If the voltage dip persists for more than 200 ms, then the motor will stop. In this case, if voltage is restored within the restart time, then voltage will be validated for restart delay time. If the restored voltage persists for the set restart delay, then the motor will restart. However, if the motor is tripped due to UV fault during voltage dip condition, then after healthy restoration of voltage, the trip will be reset and the motor will be restarted. Table 6�16 lists the Re-acceleration Protection settings available in the Relay.

Table B-1: Re-acceleration Protection Settings

Parameter

Voltage Dip

Setting range Description

Motor Voltage should go below/equal to thisthreshold value to sense as valid voltage dip

20 to 90 % of VN

Voltage RestorationMotor Voltage should restore higher than orequal to this set value to sense as validvoltage recovery

60 to 95 % of VN

Restart TimeTime for which relay will wait for voltagerestoration

0.2 to 60 sec

Restart DelayValidation time (healthy voltage should sustainfor this much period) before actual starting themotor after successful voltage recovery

4 to 1200 sec

Aux and Motor SupplyLetting know the MCOMP relay if the auxiliarysupply for it is from the same 3 phase motorsupply bus or it is from separate source

Same and Separate

Mode To enable or disable motor restart functionEnable or Disable


APPLICATION NOTES

After healthy restoration of the voltage if all the critical motors gets restarted at the same time, there may be a chance that the incoming feeder will again see a power deep and trips on under-voltage. To avoid this situation, one should group the critical motors with different priorities. The highest priority motor group should start �rst and should have same restart delay settings. The next priority motor group should then start and should have �restart delay� setting higher than �restart delay� setting of highest priority motor group. The wide range of �restart delay� setting present in the relay will allow the user to con�gure for the staggered starting of the motors and thereby ful�lling the requirement.

Presence of any maintained stop command at the time of restart command from the Relay will inhibit starting of the motor.

D] 3P-3W, 3P-4W Application

The MCOMP relay can be con�gured as per the system voltage availability. There is a setting available as �Input Voltage� in System Setting for selection of system voltage as 3P-3W or 3P-4W. In case of 3P-3W, R-Y-B voltage needs to be connected to therelay voltage terminals with 1st terminal of the relay required to be body or panel earthed. In case of 3P-4W, R-Y-B-N voltage needs to be connected to relay voltage terminals.

In case of 3P-3W, V = V and N L-L

in case of 3P-4W, V = V / �3, N L-L

where V = Line to line voltage or Motor Rated Voltage and L-L

V = Nominal voltage used in the relay for protections.N

All the voltage based protection is dependent on V and hence N

proper selection of input voltage is necessary for the required function.

Figure B-5: 3P-3W, 3P-4W Connection Diagram

3P-3W CONNECTION

1 2 3 4

N B Y R

3-PH.VOLTAGE

EARTH

SFU/MCCB

R

Y

FUSE

B

3P-4W CONNECTION

1 2 3 4

N B Y R

3-PH.VOLTAGE

SFU/MCCB

R

Y

FUSE

B

N

Note: Motor must be in running condition before voltage dip/no-voltage condition occurs.


APPLICATION NOTES

E] Two Phase Voltage Inputs (R and Y phase input) Application

In certain applications where due to space constraint only two phase inputs are required to be connected to the relay for voltage metering and protections, the MCOMP relay comes as an intelligent option.

There is a setting available in the relay as �Phase Selection� in System Setting for the same. When selected as two phase, there is no need to connect the third voltage phase to the relay and relay will calculate the same internally.

The terminal number 1 of the relay needs to be connected to clean earth for intended operation of the relay in case �two phase� is selected in setting. While selection is on three phase, one needs to necessarily follow the connections as mentioned in 3P-3W or in 3P-4W cases.

F] Winding Heating Application

In small motors (typically < 30kW) when the motors are in off condition for a very long duration and the moisture content in the environment is high, it is necessary to keep the motor winding warm to have proper starting of the motor during next start. Generally 24VAC supply is provided in two windings of the motor to achieve this with some delay after motor gets stopped.

Figure B-6: Two Phase Input Connection

Conventionally a separate winding heating contact with delay timer is required to ful�ll the requirement.

The relay provides a dedicated output called heater output for energizing the winding heating coil present in the feeder and gives the setting of time delay as �heater delay� from 1 � 3600 sec in Digital output setting section. This eliminates the need of extra timer required in the feeder to achieve the winding heating requirement in a compact scheme.

Refer digital output settings present in chapter 9 Settings for con�guration of heater output of this application.

G] Analog Output Application

Analog meters are generally used for remote metering. In a �eld where motor is present, the operator comes to know the current drawn by the motor during running condition (or any other intended parameter such as availability of healthy three phase voltage before motor starting) with the help of analog meters. This meter accept the input in form of 4-20 mA current and provides the corresponding equivalent analog scale depending on the selected parameter.

Conventionally a separate transducer along with CT is required to provide the 4�20 mA signal corresponding to one of the three phase current. This increases the space requirement of the motor feeder, cost and reduces the reliability. The required 4-20 mA signal can be generated from MCOMP as an analog output and can be directly wired to analog meter for metering. One user con�gurable 4-20 mA analog output is provided in the Relay which can be con�gured to any of the parameter such as R/Y/B phase current, R/Y/B phase voltage, power, frequency etc. The relay terminals for wiring analog output are AO1 and AO2. It is necessary to know the loading requirement of the device for proper operation of the relay.

Maximum Burden (load) the MCOMP relay can see without affecting its output current of 4-20mA is 100 ohm. So the total burden on MCOMP should be less than 100 ohm on analog output channels for intended functionality of MCOMP analog output section. If the burden exceeds 100 ohm, variation in output current can be observed.

For calculating maximum length of wire which can be connected from analog meter present in �eld (or from DCS) to the relay without affecting its output (4-20mA), one needs to know resistivity of the wire and cross sectional area of the wire used. The consideration of LCS meter (Analog meter) burden or DCS terminal burden in the calculation is important for proper functioning.

Here is the example for length calculation for copper wire having resistivity of 1.72E-08 m and considering area of 2.5E-06 sq.m. For 500 meter length of wire, using the standard formula of resistivity (R = �L/A where, R=resistance, � = resistivity, L=length, A=area), the burden offer from wire comes to be 3.44 ohm. Considering the approximate burden of 20 ohm of Analog meter (or DCS terminal), the total burden comes out to be 20 + 3.44 = 23.44 Ohm which is less than 100 ohm (MCOMP burden handle capacity).

1 2 3 4

N B Y R

3-PH.VOLTAGE

EARTH

SFU/MCCB

R

Y

2 PHASE INPUT CONNECTION


APPLICATION NOTES

The relay�s analog output will continue to provide correct 4-20mA signal as long as total external burden is less than 100 ohm.

H] Pro�bus Communication Application

Basic info regarding Pro�bus protocol:

Parameter

Media

Transmission Rate

Topology

Number of nodes

Number of repeaters

Profibus Cable

Specification of Profibus DP RS 485

Copper or Fiber

9.6 kbps to 12 mbps

Line topology with termination

Up to 32 nodes per segment (including master, Redundancy module, slave devices, repeaters)

Max total 126 per network (including master, Redundancy module, slave devices, repeaters)

Max 9 with signal refreshing

Twisted, shielded two-wire cable, cable type A

As per standard,Maximum number of nodes in a segment = 32Maximum number of nodes in a loop = 126

Segment 1 => Master to R1Segment 2 => R1 to R2Loop => Master to R2

Note: DCS burden considered for calculations is just an assumption. User should consider actual values for the calculations.

Table B-2: Pro�bus speci�cation

Figure B-7: Typical pro�bus loop connection


APPLICATION NOTES

General Calculation for �nding number of slaves which can be connected in a single loop:

Within a segment all PROFIBUS masters, slaves, repeaters, optical link modules etc. count towards the 32-device limit. This means, for example, that when two repeaters are connected to a segment the maximum number of PROFIBUS stations is reduced to 30. It is good practice to leave at least 10% spare capacity per segment for future expansion and one for diagnostic tool etc.

Pre-requisites for calculation:

� Transmission rate

� Number of data bytes expected from each slave = �A�

� Master�s(PLC/DCS) IO byte handling capability = �B�

� Redundancy module�s IO byte handling capability (if present in the network) = �C�

� Repeater use permissible?

Calculation:

� Select the lowest Input/Output byte handling capability number from �B� & �C�.

� Divide that number by �A�. (D=B/A or D=C/A)

� The value of �D� indicates the maximum number of slaves which can be ef�ciently handled by the master through Redundancy module and can be connected in a single loop.

Now if value of

�D� < 26 then repeater is not required.

26 < �D� < 28 then Repeater may or may not be required.

�D� > 28 then Use of repeater is mandatory.

So it is recommended to restrict the maximum number of slave devices (including spares) in a particular segment up to 26. User may go beyond this as per feasibility study results.

Deciding repeater usage in a project:

Repeater usage is mandatory if any of the following is true:

� Number of devices in a segment (including master, Redundancy modules, slave devices) exceeds 32

� Total segment length for desired transmission rate exceeds beyond the permissible segment length.

Refer below table for standard segment length for each transmission rate.

An application of a repeater is shown in below �gure

The standard says that a maximum of 9 repeaters may be used between any master and slave station. However many repeaters exhibit an increased delay, meaning a maximum of only 4 repeaters giving 5 in-line segments is recommended practically. This implies a maximum of 5 in-line segments from a master to the furthest slave. It is strictly recommended to use the repeaters of same make in a single loop.

The repeater location is based on below two conditions. The repeaters can be placed anywhere as long as below two conditions are ful�lled:

� Each segment generated by using repeater should have maximum 32 numbers of nodes (including repeater) as per standard.

� Each segment length should be less than the standard segment length of selected transmission rate.

Pro�bus Cabling and Installation:

General Guidelines:

� In case of RS485 transmission technology, cable type A should be used.

� When connecting the nodes, ensure that the data cables are not mixed up.

� To achieve high interference resistance of the system against electro-magnetic radiation, a shielded data cable (type A is shielded) should de�nitely be used.

� The shielding is to be connected to the protective ground on both sides ensuring good conductivity via large-area shield clamps.

� Equipotential bonding of all connected �eld devices is also recommended.

� Ensure that the data cable is laid as far away from all high -current cables as possible and they should not run in parallel as far as possible. If they need to cross, they should cross at right angle.

� Stubs must absolutely be avoided.

� The number of nodes which can be connected to a segment is limited to 32.

� The permissible length of a segment for a selected transmission rate should be considered during routing of Pro�bus cable.

Transmission rate

9.6 kbps to 187.5 kbps

500 kbps

1.5 mbps

3, 6, 12 mbps

Transmission range per Segment (m)

1000 m

400 m

200 m

100 m

Repeater extendingthe transmission path

Repeater forsegmenting

Table B-3: Transmission range

Figure B-8: Repeater


APPLICATION NOTES

Cable Segregation:

Below table shows the distances according to EN 50174-2 that must be maintained between PROFIBUS cables (shielded data cable) and other cables. The table also lists two variants with a

Profibus cable and cable for

Spacing

Without partition or withnon-metallic partition

Partition made out ofAluminum Partition made out of Steel

Signal Transmission

� Network signals such as PROFIBUS.� Digital data signals for PCs, programming devices, printers, etc.� Shielded analog inputs or outputs

0 mm 0 mm 0 mm

Power Supply or 3 phase power

200 mm

0 mm

100 mm

0 mm

50 mm

0 mm

Un-Shielded

Shielded

Shielding of Pro�bus Cable:

As per Pro�bus international document (PROFIBUS Installation Guideline for Cabling and Assembly Version 1.0.6 May 2006 Order No: 8.022), if no shield connection exists, the shielding of the PROFIBUS cable must be connected to the equipotential

e.g. power supply

Shieldingconnection

JunctionBox

Drop Cable

Drop Cable

Field Device

Field Device

Other shieldedcables

safe area explosion hazardous area

equipotential bonding system

Trunk Cable

metal isolating segment. Here, it is assumed that a metal partition has the same effect as a cable shield.

bonding as close as possible to the PROFIBUS station. For electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) reasons you should connect the shield of the PROFIBUS cable to the equipotential bonding system at both ends.

Parameter

Impedance

Operational Capacity

Loop Resistance

Wire diameter

Wire CSA

Construction

Specified Limits

135..165 � with f = 3�.20 MHz

< 30 pF / m

< 110 � / km

> 0.64 mm

> 0.34 mm2

Shielded, twisted pair

Table B-4: Cable type A Electrical speci�cations

Table B-5: Cable segregation

Figure B-9: Pro�bus cable shielding


APPLICATION NOTES

Several options are available for establishing the large-area connection between the shielding and the equipotential bonding system. The following �gure shows various techniques that can be adapted in the �eld. For more information regarding connection, refer PROFIBUS Installation Guideline for Cabling and Assembly Version 1.0.6 May 2006 Order No: 8.022 document.

Special requirements for transmission rates >1.5 Mbit/s:

� Use of bit-rate greater than 1.5 Mbit/s requires special connectors with built in inductors.

� Spur lines are not allowed when using bit rates greater than 1.5 Mbit/s.

� The maximum segment length is 100m.

� A minimum cable length of 1m is recommended between any two stations.

Guidelines for redundancy module placement in a switchboard:

� It is always recommended to place a redundancy module at the start of the loop.

� In case of more than one redundancy module, it is recommended to keep all the redundancy modules at one location for easy automation. Starting loop connection of slave devices for each redundancy module needs to be brought up to that single location.

Common Errors in Pro�bus communication:

1. Termination problems:

� Lack of terminations at the end of a segment.

� Double termination, caused by devices with inbuilt termination.

� Termination in the middle of a segment (can be caused by devices with inbuilt termination).

� Unpowered terminations (unplugged or unpowered devices).

� Incorrectly wired isolating connectors (only becomes a problem when switched on).

2. Pickup and interference caused by:

� Laying bus cables too close to electrically noisy power cables or equipment.

� Screen current due to earth potential differences between areas of the network.

3. Wiring problems:

� Wrong cable used (e.g. using PA cable for DP segments).

� Damaged cable (including squashed, over-bent)

� Swapped cores at a device (B-RED rule broken)

� Un-earthed screen (not connected at every device)

4. Segment rules broken:

� Cable too long for the bit rate used.

� Too many devices (never more than 32 RS-485 drivers on a segment).

� Use of spur lines (keep short at lower bit rates and don�t use at higher bit rates).

5. Damaged or uncerti�ed devices

� Excessive connection capacitance.

� Faulty or poor quality RS-485 driver chips

I] Protection Function Application

Thermal Overload Case Study

In MCOMP Relay due to constant asymptotic factor k the thermal curve plotted is shifted by 1.15 Times of Iset i.e. If IFLC = 100A, Iset = 100% (Step Size � 5%) the curve starts from 1.15 Time of IFLC.

In certain applications thermal Overload Curve calculations should start from 100% of FLC. To achieve the thermal overload curve starting at 98% of FLC we have to set Iset at 85% so that the curve starts at 98% of FLC (i.e. 85 * 1.15).

But when user is setting Iset = 85% in thermal overload setting, it means any current above 85% of FLC is not the normal running current. However relay will not trip on overload until current goes above 98% of FLC as thermal overload curve starts from 98%.

Tripping of Motor on Thermal Overload during Starting state of the motor:

As soon as the motor receives a start command and as per current drawn by the motor, the relay starts accumulating thermal memory and during starting if the thermal memory/capacity reaches 100 % it does not issue a trip command till starting time (Start Time Set in Relay) expires. Relay issues a trip command immediately after start time (Start Time Set in Relay) is elapsed on Thermal Overload Protection.

Figure B-10: Shielding and equipotential bonding system


APPLICATION NOTES

Tripping of Motor on Thermal Overload during Running state of the motor:

Relay starts accumulating thermal memory during starting condition and gets settle as soon as motor is started successfully.

During running condition if the currents exceeds 98% of FLC the Thermal Memory start increasing and if the memory reaches 100 % issue a trip command as per the time calculated by the relay.

Motor Current

Thermal OLProtection Trip

Thermal Memory= 100%

Relay ThermalCurveStart Time = 10 Sec

100%

98% of FLC

70%

Motor Starting Motor Running

ThermalO/L Pick Up

Motor Current

Thermal OLProtection Trip

ThermalMemory = 100%

Relay ThermalCurveStart Time = 10 Sec

100%

98% of FLC

Figure B-11: Thermal overload during starting state of the motor

Figure B-12: Thermal overload during running state of the motor

Effect on Excessive Start Time Protection due to settingIset = 85%:

During excessive start time protection, MCOMP relay checks if the motor has gone above IFLC and comes back to the Iset or less than Iset (will be equal to IFLC in case of Iset=100%) as speci�ed by the user within the set starting time (i.e. Time Delay Set in Relay for Starting Time).

When user is setting Iset = 85%, during Starting MCOMP relay checks if the motor has gone above IFLC and whether it has come back to 85% of IFLC within the set starting time. If the current drawn by the motor after starting time has just elapsed is greater than 85% of IFLC then MCOMP issues a trip command on Excessive Start Time Protection.


APPLICATION NOTES

Locked Rotor Protection

MCOMP relay checks if the motor current has gone above the Locked Rotor Setting in Starting or in Running Condition. The trip command will be generated by the relay only after speci�ed delay in Lock Rotor Setting; however the relay issues actual trip command as per following:

Locked rotor during starting state of the motor:

Case a) Locked rotor condition occurs and resets before starting time expires: (i.e. during starting state of the motor and after start command is issued)

If the measured current is greater than the set value, locked rotor timer gets activated and does not issue a trip command till starting time expires. If the measured current reduces below Locked Rotor Pickup before the start time is elapsed, locked rotor timer will get reset and trip will not be issued.

Case b) Locked rotor condition occurs and does not reset before starting time expires:

If the measured current is greater than the set value, locked rotor timer gets activated and does not issue a trip command till starting time expires. Relay issues a trip command immediately after start time is elapsed if the current doesn�t fall below Lock Rotor Pickup. Assumption: Starting Time = 10 Sec / Lock Rotor Trip Delay = 2 Sec.

Locked rotor during running state of the motor:

During Running Condition if the measured current is greater than the pick-up set value, locked rotor timer gets activated and issues a trip command after the Locked Rotor Timer is elapsed provided the locked rotor condition is persisting at the time of tripping.

J] Watchdog Application

In the unlikely event of internal relay failure, the relay shall changeover one of its con�gured output contacts so that user can interpret that the relay has failed, thereby corresponding corrective or preventive action can be taken. To meet this, watchdog register is available in MCOMP on Modbus communication protocol and as well as in MCOMP COMPlogic input list. This gives the user �exibility to con�gure the watchdog bit in any of the Digital output/COMPlogic modules of the MCOMP. Following 10 individual watchdog error bits & 1 common bit obtained by logically OR all 10 watchdog bits is available in MCOMPs �COMP logic input� list.

1. Vref error of R-Phase Current Channel

2. Vref error of Y-Phase Current Channel

3. Vref error of B-Phase Current Channel

4. Vref error of R-Phase Voltage Channel

5. Vref error of Y-Phase Voltage Channel

6. Vref error of B-Phase Voltage Channel

7. Descriptor Error

8. ADC Failure

9. RTC Failure

10. CM detect error

11. Common watchdog bit

User gets �exibility to con�gure the individual watchdog bits & the common watchdog bit into COMPlogic modules. These complogic modules can be assigned to any of the Digital output of MCOMP to achieve intended functionality.

Lock Rotor TripDelay Timer Starts

Lock Rotor TimeElapsed

L.R. Delay2 Sec

Start Time = 10 Sec

Lock Rotor PickupReset Lock Rotor Plot

L.R.Pickup

Starting Curve

Figure B-13: Motor does not trip on locked rotor (Starting state)

Lock Rotor Plot

Lock RotorProtectionTripped

Motor Trip on Lock Rotor

Starting CurveL.R.Pickup

Start Time = 10 Sec

Lock Rotor TripDelay Timer Starts

Lock Rotor TimeElapsed

L.R. Delay2 Sec

Figure B-14: Motor tripped on locked rotor (starting state)


APPLICATION NOTES

Error Name

Vref error (for all channel)

Impact on MCOMP operationPossible error Causes

� Metering of corresponding parameter will not be accurate and can go random. Subsequently the protection operation will be affected.

� Vref error will get reset after troubleshooting & repairing.

� Internal power supply failure.

� Component damage to long run or end of life.

� Temperature drift.

� Dry soldering of component short.

Descriptor error � High voltage on voltage supply channel will corrupt the data stored in EEPROM.

� Noise on data channel will write improper data into EEPROM.

� In case of temporary noise or over voltage on supply, EEPROM memory will be unavailable for reading or writing settings & settings will reset to default.

� In above case EEPROM will become available for normal operation again after Power recycle & descriptor error will get reset.

� In case of component failure, Descriptor error will get reset after hardware repairing.

� High voltage on EEPROM voltage supply channel.

� Noise on EEPROM data channel.

� Component damage.

ADC Failure � Metering will be unde�ned and proper protection operation cannot be guaranteed.

� High voltage on ADC channel.

� Internal module failure.

RTC Failure � Thermal overload, Re-acceleration, Max start per hour calculation fails at power on.

� Time stamp will not be accurate

� Repairing will be required for resetting error.

� RTC battery drained.

� RTC module failure

CM Detect Error � Issues STOP command if Current Auto Stop is enabled.

� If current auto stop is disabled, current based protection will be of�ine.

� MCOMP Auxiliary power recycling after Reconnecting CT module cable will reset error.

� CT module is not connected.

� CT wire is open or CT module disconnection.

Table B-6: Cause & e�ect matrix for watchdog bits


APPLICATION NOTES

K] Single Phase Motor Application

MCOMP relay can be used for protecting single phase motor. There are two ways for connection depending upon the requirement as follows:

1. When only current based protection and metering is required:

Wiring requirement:

� The single phase (power cable) needs to be passed through R phase of MCOMP current module.

� No connection at MCOMP voltage terminals. (Voltage connect setting should be Disabled in MCOMP relay)

� All other control wiring (DI/DO) as per requirement in the scheme.

Reference connection diagram for Current Module connection is shown below.

Main unitCurrent Module

M

Y B

R

VR VY VB VN

Setting Requirement:

�Voltage connect� setting in system setting needs to be disabled. Following protections should be disabled for faithful operation:

� Current unbalance

� Earth fault

� Voltage based protections

� Frequency based protections

� Phase loss

� Phase reversal

Metering Info:

Following metering parameters needs to be ignored:

� Iy, Ib, Iavg, Ie

� Voltage, Frequency, Energy, Power, PF, Phase sequence parameters

Figure B-15: Single Phase Motor Application 1


APPLICATION NOTES

2. When current and voltage based protection and metering is required:

Wiring requirement:

� The single phase (power cable) needs to be passed through R phase of MCOMP current module.

� Phase and Neutral needs to be connected at MCOMP voltage terminals as shown in below diagram.

� All other control wiring (DI/DO) as per requirement in the scheme.

Reference connection diagram for Current Module and Main unit connection is shown below.

Setting Requirement:

�Voltage connect� setting in system setting needs to be enabled.

Main unitCurrent Module

M

Y B

R

VR VY VB VN

Ph

Neu

Following protections should be disabled for faithful operation:

� Current unbalance

� Earth fault

� Phase Loss

� Voltage Unbalance

� Frequency based protections

� Phase Reversal

Metering Info:

Following metering parameters needs to be ignored:

� Iy, Ib, Iavg, Ie

� Phase sequence parameters

Figure B-16: Single Phase Motor Application 2


REVISION LOG

Released DateRev Description

A June 2012

B January 2013

Added CE Certi�cate and Declaration of Conformity (16 & 17)

Modi�ed MCOMP Order Codes (28 - in Introduction)

Modi�ed sensing range for Digital Input(31) & added Relay element Communication Failure (36) in Speci�cation

Modi�ed Speci�cation Labels (41) & added Disposal of the Relay (65) in Installation

Note added for terminal numbers of expandable MCOMP version (11).

Added number of Start Parameter in Monitoring (73 � in Metering & Monitoring)

Added Communication Failure Protection (98 - Protection)

Updated Digital Output settings (104), number of Truth Tables (106), and the List of COMPlogic Inputs (114) in DIO and COMPlogic)

Modi�ed Memory Map and GSD modules for Pro�bus (from 147 in Communication)

Added Mode change settings, Communication failure settings, Trip only remote setting, etc. (from 204 in Setting Sheet)

Added Special Commands table, Inhibit Status table, etc (from 305 in Troubleshooting)

Added Application Notes (309)

Description

C Dec 2015

Brief changes are:

Introduction: added product overview �gure, expansion DIO description, modi�ed order codes

Speci�cations: added 51P, 51N settings in relay elements, modi�ed general speci�cations, corrected minor mistakes in settings

Installation: changed display dimension �gure, removed product speci�cation label, changed display mounting �gure, changed relay main unit overview �gure (terminal numbers changed), added external CT wiring diagram, removed starter types

Protections: corrected mistakes in overload trip chart, added IDMT over current protection, added description in temperature protection

Communication: removed modbus function codes description, memory map moved to separate annexure

Settings: added system setting parameter description, digital input/output setting parameter description, modi�ed case studies, modi�ed setting sheet for new parameters

User Interface: changed display �gure

Testing and troubleshooting : added brief testing methodology

Annexure A Memory Maps: Pro�bus output bytes changed, added detailed GSD modules and input list and their description

Annexure B Application notes : Newly added

Table R-1: Revision log


NOTES

MC

OM

P23.

11.2

016

Registered Of�ce:L&T House, N. M. MargBallard EstateMumbai 400 001, INDIA

Malaysia

TAMCO SWITCHGEAR (MALAYSIA) SDN BHDSub Lot 24, Lot 16505, Jalan Keluli 1

Section 7

Tel: +603 3361 8200Fax: +603 3341 6200Email: [email protected]

Sales Offices - International

TAMCO Electrical Industries Australia Pty Ltd31 Kitchen Road, Dandenong 3175Melbourne, Victoria, AustraliaTel:+613 9706 7288Fax:+613 9706 9112Email: [email protected]

Australia

Indonesia

PT. TAMCO IndonesiaF-36, Jalan Jababeka Raya Jababeka Industrial EstateCikarang Utara, Bekasi, 17530,IndonesiaTel.: +62 21 893 5070 Fax: +62 21 893 5071 Email: [email protected]

Hyderabad

Post Bag 12, Vasantha Chambers

Hyderabad 500 004Tel: +91-40-6672 0210Fax: +91-40-2324 2356Email: [email protected]

New Delhi

Post Bag 622332, Shivaji MargNew Delhi 110 015Tel: +91-11-4141 9620/9942Fax: +91-11-4141 9625Email: [email protected]

Chennai

L&T Construction CampusTC-1 Building, II FloorMount-Poonamallee Road

Tel:+91-44-2270 6801Fax:+91-44-2270 6930Email: [email protected]

Manapakkam, Chennai 600 089

Radhadaya Complex, J. P. RoadVadodara 390 015Tel: +91-265-66136 37/38Fax: +91-265-2336 184Email: [email protected]

Sales Offices - India

Bengaluru

Bengaluru 560001Tel: 080-25020319Fax: 080-25596397Email: [email protected]

Kolkata

Mumbai

Post Bag 619

Kolkata 700 071Tel. : +91-33-4400 2550 / 2558Fax. : +91-33-22827587 / 1025Email: [email protected]

L&T Gate No. 5, L&T Business Park TC -II,Tower B - 7 th �oor, Saki Vihar road, Powai Mumbai 400 072 Tel:+91-22-6705 3083Fax:+91-22-6705 1556 Email: [email protected]

India

L&T Gate NO. 5, L&T Business Park TC -II,Tower B - 7 th �oor, Saki vihar road, Mumbai 400 072 Tel:+91-22-6705 2813Fax:+91-22-6705 1024 Email: [email protected]

Kuwait

Kana Controls General Trading &Contracting Co. W.L.LP.O Box: 25593 Safat, 13116 Kuwait Tel: +965-2474 1373 Faxs: +965-2474 1537 Email: [email protected]

2203, 22nd Floor

Abu Dhabi, UAETel. : +971-2-676 5988Fax. : +971-2-676 6399Email: [email protected]

Saudi Arabia

L&T Electricals Saudi Arabia Company Limited - L. L. CMH-4, Plot: 17+19

Kingdom of Saudi ArabiaTel: +966-3-8127708Fax: +966-3-8127780Email: [email protected]

Oman

P.O.Box 598, Ruwi, Postal Code-112Sultanate of OmanTel:+968 98034317Mob:+968 98034317EMail: [email protected]

Najma Intersection, Opp: Doha CinemaC-Ring Road,P.O Box No- 24399Doha, QatarTel: +974-44-239 000Fax: +974-44-551 286Email: [email protected]

Qatar

Larsen & Toubro Limited, Electrical Systems & Equipment - Head Of�ce

Email: [email protected] Website: www.lntebg.comThe information contained herein is correct at time of printing, but as the products and its manufacturing processes are being developed continuously,this information is subject to change without notice and the company cannot be held liable for any alleged misinterpretation howsoever arising.

7C, TC II, Tower B, Level 7, L&T Gate No. 5, Saki Vihar Road, Powai, Mumbai 400 072.Tel: +91-22-6705 1748 Fax: +91-22-6705 1556

Complete Solution for Motor Protection · INSTRUCTION MANUAL MCOMP User Manual - REV. C Complete...

Documents

Transcript of Complete Solution for Motor Protection · INSTRUCTION MANUAL MCOMP User Manual - REV. C Complete...